Panasonic DMR EH56 EH55 User Manual To The 0522ff64 155d 41a7 A841 D5fddfd7982a

User Manual: Panasonic DMR-EH56 to the manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 84

DownloadPanasonic DMR-EH56 EH55 User Manual  To The 0522ff64-155d-41a7-a841-d5fddfd7982a
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
EH55.book

Page 1 Thursday, January 19, 2006 1:58 PM

Operating Instructions
DVD Recorder

Model No.

DMR-EH55
DMR-EH56

Region number supported by
this unit
HARD DISK DRIVE

Region numbers are allocated to DVD players
and DVD-Video according to where they are
sold.
≥The region number of this unit is “2”.
≥The unit will play DVD-Video marked with
labels containing “2” or “ALL”.
Example:

2

ALL

2
3

5

Web Site: http://www.panasonic-europe.com

Dear customer
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum
performance and safety, please read these
instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this
product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.

The GUIDE Plus+ system is available in the
following countries:
Austria/Belgium/France/Germany/Italy/
Netherlands/Spain/Switzerland
(As of end of February 2006)
≥This service may not be available in some
areas in the above countries.
≥There may be changes in the service areas.

EC EG

RQT8415-L

EH55.book

Page 2 Thursday, January 19, 2006 1:58 PM

SUOMI

CAUTION!
THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE
SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS
RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.

WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR
PRODUCT DAMAGE, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS
TO RAIN, MOISTURE, DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT
NO OBJECTS FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES,
SHALL BE PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.

CAUTION!
≥DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE,
BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE.
ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED. TO PREVENT
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO
OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND ANY
OTHER MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE
VENTILATION VENTS.
≥DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE UNIT’S VENTILATION OPENINGS
WITH NEWSPAPERS, TABLECLOTHS, CURTAINS, AND
SIMILAR ITEMS.
≥DO NOT PLACE SOURCES OF NAKED FLAMES, SUCH AS
LIGHTED CANDLES, ON THE UNIT.
≥DISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY
FRIENDLY MANNER.
THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN MODERATE CLIMATES.
This product may receive radio interference caused by mobile
telephones during use. If such interference is apparent, please
increase separation between the product and the mobile
telephone.
The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and
easily accessible or the mains plug or an appliance coupler shall
remain readily operable.

CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT

VAROITUS!
LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN MUULLA KUIN TÄSSÄ
KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA
ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄN TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1
YLITTÄVÄLLE NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE.

VAROITUS:
TULIPALO-, SÄHKÖISKUVAARAN TAI TUOTETTA
KOHTAAVAN MUUN VAHINGON VÄHENTÄMISEKSI EI
LAITETTA SAA ALTISTAA SATEELLE, KOSTEUDELLE,
VESIPISAROILLE TAI ROISKEELLE, EIKÄ NESTETTÄ
SISÄLTÄVIÄ ESINEITÄ, KUTEN ESIMERKIKSI MALJAKOITA,
SAA ASETTAA LAITTEEN PÄÄLLE.

VAROITUS!
≥ÄLÄ ASENNA TAI LAITA TÄTÄ LAITETTA
KABINETTITYYPPISEEN KIRJAKAAPPIIN TAI MUUHUN
SULJETTUUN TILAAN, JOTTA TUULETUS ONNISTUISI.
VARMISTA, ETTÄ VERHO TAI MIKÄÄN MUU MATERIAALI
EI HUONONNA TUULETUSTA, JOTTA VÄLTETTÄISIIN
YLIKUUMENEMISESTA JOHTUVA SÄHKÖISKU- TAI
TULIPALOVAARA.
≥ÄLÄ PEITÄ LAITTEEN TUULETUSAUKKOJA
SANOMALEHDELLÄ, PÖYTÄLIINALLA, VERHOLLA TAI
MUULLA VASTAAVALLA ESINEELLÄ.
≥ÄLÄ ASETA PALAVAA KYNTTILÄÄ TAI MUUTA AVOTULEN
LÄHDETTÄ LAITTEEN PÄÄLLE.
≥HÄVITÄ PARISTOT LUONTOA VAHINGOITTAMATTOMALLA
TAVALLA.
TÄMÄ LAITE ON TARKOITETTU KÄYTETTÄVÄKSI LEUDOSSA
ILMASTOSSA.
Laite tulee asettaa lähelle verkkopistorasiaa ja pistokkeen täytyy
olla sellaisessa asennossa, että siihen on helppo tarttua
ongelman sattuessa.

NORSK

ADVARSEL!
DETTE PRODUKTET ANVENDER EN LASER.
BETJENING AV KONTROLLER, JUSTERINGER ELLER
ANDRE INNGREP ENN DE SOM ER BESKREVET I DENNE
BRUKSANVISNING, KAN FØRE TIL FARLIG BESTRÅLING.
DEKSLER MÅ IKKE ÅPNES, OG FORSØK ALDRI Å
REPARERE APPARATET PÅ EGENHÅND. ALT SERVICE OG
REPARASJONSARBEID MÅ UTFØRES AV KVALIFISERT
PERSONELL.

ADVARSEL:
FOR Å REDUSERE FAREN FOR BRANN, ELEKTRISK STØT
ELLER SKADER PÅ PRODUKTET, MÅ DETTE APPARATET
IKKE UTSETTES FOR REGN, FUKTIGHET, VANNDRÅPER
ELLER VANNSPRUT. DET MÅ HELLER IKKE PLASSERES
GJENSTANDER FYLT MED VANN, SLIK SOM
BLOMSTERVASER, OPPÅ APPARATET.

ADVARSEL!

(Inside of product)
(Tuotteen sisällä)
(Produktets innside)

≥APPARATET MÅ IKKE PLASSERES I EN BOKHYLLE, ET
INNEBYGGET KABINETT ELLER ET ANNET LUKKET STED
HVOR VENTILASJONSFORHOLDENE ER
UTILSTREKKELIGE. SØRG FOR AT GARDINER ELLER
LIGNENDE IKKE FORVERRER
VENTILASJONSFORHOLDENE, SÅ RISIKO FOR
ELEKTRISK SJOKK ELLER BRANN FORÅRSAKET AV
OVERHETING UNNGÅS.
≥APPARATETS VENTILASJONSÅPNINGER MÅ IKKE
DEKKES TIL MED AVISER, BORDDUKER , GARDINER OG
LIGNENDE.
≥PLASSER IKKE ÅPEN ILD, SLIK SOM LEVENDE LYS, OPPÅ
APPARATET.
≥BRUKTE BATTERIER MÅ KASSERES UTEN FARE FOR
MILJØET.
DETTE APPARATET ER BEREGNET TIL BRUK UNDER
MODERATE KLIMAFORHOLD.

RQT8415

2

Keep the small memory cards such as the SD
Memory Card out of reach of children. If
swallowed, seek medical advice immediately.

Utstyret bør plasseres i nærheten av AC-stikkontakten, og
støpslet må være lett tilgjengelig hvis det skulle oppstå
problemer.

EH55.book

Page 3 Thursday, January 19, 2006 1:58 PM

Table of contents
Getting started

Editing

HDD, disc and card information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Important notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Disc and card handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Included accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
The remote control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
The unit’s display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

STEP 1 Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and
TV aspect settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
GUIDE Plus+ system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
GUIDE Plus+ data download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Editing programme lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Changing the settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Set up to match your television and remote control . .22
To enjoy progressive video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Recording
Recording television programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Disc Insertion/Ejection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To specify a time to stop recording—One Touch Recording . . .
Recording settings for High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25
26
26
27
27

Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Editing titles/chapters and playing chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Title operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Creating, editing and playing playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Creating playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing and playing playlists/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playlist operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

46
47
47
47

Editing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Album and picture operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Delete Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Deleting titles or pictures during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Copying
Copying titles or playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying a finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying MPEG2 moving pictures from an SD card . . . . . . . . . .

52
53
55
55

Copying still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Copying using the copying list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Copying all the still pictures on a card—Copy All Pictures . . . . . 57

Copying from a video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system to make timer recordings . . . .
Operations in the GUIDE Plus+ system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using SHOWVIEW number to make timer recordings . . . . . . . . .
Manually programming timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To cancel recording when recording has already begun . . . . . .
To release the unit from recording standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VPS/PDC function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28
29
30
30
31
31
31
31
32
32
32

Recording broadcasts from an external equipment . . .33
Making timer recordings on the television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Recording from digital/satellite receiver or decoder . . . . . . . . . . 33
Linked timer recordings with
external equipment (digital/satellite receiver) — EXT LINK . . 33

Playing back
Playing recorded video contents/
Playing play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Operations during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Playing DivX discs,
MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) . . . . . . . . . .37
Regarding DivX discs,
MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting file type to play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing DivX discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing MP3 discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37
38
38
39
40
41

Using on-screen menus/Status message. . . . . . . . . . . 42
Using on-screen menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Convenient functions
Linked operations with the TV (Q Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
HDD, disc and card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Providing a name for a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting all the contents of a disc or card—Format . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the background style–Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first
–Auto-Play Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment
–Finalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Top Menu–Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FUNCTIONS window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary of settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TV System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

60
60
60
61
61
62
62
62
62

63
64
64
65
65
66
69
70
71

Reference
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back cover

RQT8415

3

EH55.book

Page 4 Thursday, January 19, 2006 1:58 PM

HDD, disc and card information
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play
DVD-RAM
≥4.7 GB/9.4 GB, 12 cm
≥2.8 GB, 8 cm

Hard disk drive (HDD)
≥160 GB

Disc type

Logo

–

Indicated in these
instructions by

[HDD]

[RAM]

DVD Video Recording format
This is a recording method which allows you to record and edit television broadcasts and so on.
≥You can delete unwanted parts of a title, create playlists, etc.
≥Digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” can be recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.

Recording format

Data that can be recorded
and played

Video
Still pictures

Video
Still pictures

Y

Y

–

Only on DVD-RAM compatible players.

–

Up to 5X recording speed discs.

Re-writable§1
Play on other players

§2

Compatible with high
speed recording§3

What you can do on this unit (Y: Can do, t: Cannot do)
Recording broadcasts that
allow one copy

Y

Y [CPRM (➡ 81) compatible discs only.]

Recording both M 1 and
M 2 for bilingual
broadcasts§4

Y

Y

Recording 16:9 aspect
picture§4

Y

Y

Creating and editing
playlists

Y

Y

Disc type

DVD-R
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm
≥1.4 GB, 8 cm

DVD-R DL
(dual layer on single side)
≥You cannot directly record to a
DVD-R DL disc on this unit (➡ 8)

DVD-RW
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm
≥1.4 GB, 8 cm

Logo

Indicated in these
instructions by

[-R] before finalization

[-R]DL] before finalization

[-RW‹V›] before finalization

[DVD-V] after finalization

[DVD-V] after finalization

[DVD-V] after finalization

DVD-Video format
Recording format
Data that can be recorded
and played

This recording method is the same as commercially available DVD-Video.
≥Digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be recorded.
Video

Video

Video

t

t

Y

Only after finalizing the disc (➡ 62, 81).

Only on DVD-R DL compatible
players after finalizing the disc
(➡ 62, 81).

Only after finalizing the disc
(➡ 62, 81).

Up to 16X recording speed discs.

Up to 4X recording speed discs.

Up to 6X recording speed discs.

t

t

t

Recording both M 1 and
M 2 for bilingual
broadcasts§4

t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 67, Bilingual
Audio Selection)]

t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 67,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]

t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 67,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]

Recording 16:9 aspect
picture§4

t (The picture is recorded in 4:3 aspect.)

t (The picture is recorded in 4:3
aspect.)

t (The picture is recorded in 4:3
aspect.)

t

t

t

Re-writable§1
Play on other players§2
Compatible with high
speed recording§3

What you can do on this unit (Y: Can do, t: Cannot do)
Recording broadcasts that
allow one copy

Creating and editing
playlists
RQT8415

4

(continued on the next page)

EH55.book

Page 5 Thursday, January 19, 2006 1:58 PM

HDD and discs you can use for recording and play
(continued)

Logo
Indicated in these
instructions by

–

–

[+R] before finalization

[+R]DL] before finalization

[DVD-V] after finalization

[DVD-V] after finalization

Compatible with high
speed recording§3

–
[+RW]

≥Digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be recorded.
Video

Video

Video

t

t

Y

Only after finalizing the disc (➡ 62, 81).

Only on +R DL compatible players
after finalizing the disc (➡ 62, 81).

Only on +RW compatible players.

Up to 16X recording speed discs.

Up to 2.4X recording speed discs.

Up to 4X recording speed discs.§6

t

t

t

t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 67,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]

t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 67,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]

t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 67,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]

t (The picture is recorded in 4:3
aspect.)

t (The picture is recorded in 4:3
aspect.)

t (The picture is recorded in 4:3
aspect.)

t

t

t

Re-writable§1
Play on other players§2

+RW

+VR format

Recording format
Data that can be recorded
and played

+R DL
(double layer on single side)
≥You cannot directly record to a
+R DL disc on this unit (➡ 8)

+R§5
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm

What you can do on this unit (Y: Can do, t: Cannot do)
Recording broadcasts that
allow one copy
Recording both M 1 and
M 2 for bilingual
broadcasts§4
Recording 16:9 aspect
picture§4
Creating and editing playlists

HDD, disc and card information

Disc type

§1

The amount of the recordable disc space doesn’t increase even if the programme is deleted when you use one time recording disc.
§2 [RAM] Can be played on Panasonic DVD recorders and DVD-RAM compatible DVD players.
If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment.
§3 The high speed recording discs listed here are compatible with this unit. However, this is not the copy speed.
§4 For further information (➡ 8, Important notes for recording)
§5 +R discs recorded with this unit and +R discs recorded with another Panasonic DVD recorder may be incompatible. However, discs that are
finalized are compatible and can be played.
§6 You can play 8X recording speed discs recorded on another equipment.
≥We recommend using Panasonic discs and cards. We also recommend using DVD-RAM discs with cartridges to protect them from scratches
and dirt.
≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the recording.
≥You cannot record programmes that allow “One time only recording” to CPRM compatible DVD-R and DVD-RW on this unit.You can record other
programmes as DVD-Video format.
≥This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC signals. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)
Play of discs recorded with both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.

[Note]
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, the restrictions on secondary audio recording etc. are also applied to DVD-RAM. Turn this setting
“Off” if high speed copy to DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme (➡ 26).
Finalize
A process that makes play of a recorded disc possible on equipment that can play such media. After finalizing, the disc becomes play-only and
you can no longer record or edit. (➡ 62)
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM recordable on recording equipment. (➡ 61)

You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.

When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL
(Double Layer, single-sided) discs have two writable
layers on one side. If there is not enough space on the
first layer to record a programme, the balance is
recorded on the second layer. When playing a title
recorded on both layers, the unit automatically
switches between layers and plays the title in the same
way as a normal programme. However, video and
audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is
switching layers.

When switching layers:
Video and audio may momentarily cut

Second recordable layer
The available
space

(Inner
section of the
disc)
First recordable layer
DVD-R DL
+R DL

Title 1

(Outer section
of the disc)

Title 2
Playback direction

∫ Recording modes and approximate recording times ➡ 25

RQT8415

5

EH55.book

Page 6 Thursday, January 19, 2006 1:58 PM

HDD, disc and card information

Play-only discs (12 cm/8 cm)
Disc type

DVD-Video

DVD-Audio

DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format)

[DVD-A]

[-RW‹VR›]

Logo

Indicated in
these
[DVD-V]
instructions by
Instructions
High quality movie and music discs

High fidelity music
DVD-RW recorded on another DVD Recorder
discs
≥You can play programmes that allow “One time only recording”
≥Played on this unit
if they have been recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.
≥By formatting (➡ 61) the disc, you can record to it in DVDin 2 channels.
Video format and play it on this unit.
≥It may be necessary to finalize the disc on the equipment
used for recording.

.

Disc type

DVD-R

CD

Logo

Indicated in
these
DivX, MP3, JPEG/TIFF
[CD]
instructions by
Instructions
Recorded audio and music
≥DVD-R§1 with video
recorded in DivX
(including CD-R/RW§1)
≥DVD-R§1 with music
recorded in MP3
≥DVD-R§1 with still pictures
recorded in JPEG and
TIFF

SVCD§2

Video CD

–

[VCD]

DivX, MP3, JPEG/TIFF
≥CD-R and CD-RW§1
with video recorded in
DivX
≥CD-R and CD-RW§1
with music recorded in
MP3
≥CD-R and CD-RW§1
with still pictures
recorded in JPEG and
TIFF

Recorded music and video (including
CD-R/RW§1)

§1

Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.
Conforming to IEC62107.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.

§2

Regarding DVD-Audio
Some multi-channel DVD-Audio will prevent down-mixing (➡ 81) of all or part of their contents if this is the manufacturer’s intention. Tracks that
are prevented from being down-mixed will not play properly on this unit (e.g. audio is played from the front two channels only). Refer to the
disc’s jacket for more information.

Discs that cannot be played
≥2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm
≥3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
≥DVD-R recorded in DVD Video Recording format
≥DVD-R (DVD-Video format), DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL recorded on another unit and not finalized (➡ 81).
≥DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or “ALL”
≥Blu-ray
≥DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,
SACD, MV-Disc, PD,
“Chaoji VCD” available on the market including CVD, DVCD and
SVCD that do not conform to IEC62107, etc.

Types of disc or title recorded on HDD
for the type of connected TV
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a
title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.
(Y: Possible to view, t: Impossible to view)
TV type

Disc/Titles
recorded on HDD

Yes/No

PAL

Y

NTSC

Y§1

PAL

t

NTSC

Y§2

PAL

Y

NTSC

Y§3 (PAL60)

Multi-system TV

NTSC TV

PAL TV
§1

RQT8415

6

If you select “NTSC” in “TV System” (➡ 70), the picture may be
clearer.
§2 Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (➡ 70).
§3 If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals
the picture will not be shown correctly.
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you
match the “TV System” setting to the title (➡ 70).

EH55.book

Page 7 Thursday, January 19, 2006 1:58 PM

Type

SD Memory Card
miniSDTM Card§
MultiMediaCard

Indicated in these instructions
by

[SD]

Data that can be recorded and
played

Still pictures
Video (MPEG2)

Instructions

You can insert directly into the SD card slot.
A miniSDTM card adaptor included with the miniSDTM card is necessary.
≥You can play and copy still pictures taken on a digital camera etc. (➡ 40, 56).
≥You can set the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) for automatic printing on your home printer or at a
photo developing store (➡ 49, 81).
≥MPEG2 moving pictures shot with a Panasonic SD Video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or
DVD-RAM. (➡ 55)
≥MPEG2 moving pictures cannot be played directly from the SD card.

§

≥Compatible with: FAT 12 or FAT 16

HDD, disc and card information

Cards you can use on this unit

Suitable SD Memory Cards
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with the following capacities (from 8 MB to 2 GB).
8 MB,
128 MB,

16 MB,
256 MB,

32 MB,
512 MB,

64 MB,
1 GB,

2 GB (Maximum)

≥Useable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.
≥Please confirm the latest information on the following website.
http://panasonic.co.jp/pavc/global/cs
(This site is in English only.)
≥If the SD Memory Card is formatted on other equipment, the time spent for recording may become longer. Also if the SD Memory Card is
formatted on a PC, you may not be able to use it on this unit. In these cases, format the card on this unit (➡ 61, 81).
≥This unit supports SD Memory Cards formatted in FAT 12 system and FAT 16 system based on SD Memory Card Specifications.
≥We recommend using a Panasonic SD card.

Structure of folders displayed by this unit
The following

can be displayed on this unit.

¢¢¢: Numbers

XXX: Letters
Card

DVD-RAM

DCIM (Higher folder)
¢¢¢XXXXX (Picture folder)
JPEG

XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF

DCIM¢¢¢ (Higher folder)
¢¢¢XXXXX (Picture folder)

IM¢¢CDPF or IMEXPORT

XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF
§

DCIM

§

XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF

¢¢¢XXXXX

SD_VIDEO
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF

PRG¢¢¢ (MPEG2 folder)
MOV¢¢¢MOD
MOV¢¢¢MOI
PRG¢¢¢PGI
MGR_INFO (MPEG2 information folder)

§ Folders can be created on other equipment. However, these folders cannot be selected as a copying destination.
≥The folder cannot be displayed if the numbers are all “0” (e.g., DCIM000, etc.).
≥If a folder name or file name has been input using other equipment, the name may not be displayed properly or you may not be able to play
or edit the data.

RQT8415

7

EH55.book

Page 8 Thursday, January 19, 2006 1:58 PM

Important notes for recording
When recording a
bilingual programme

[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Select the main or secondary audio before
recording
(➡ 67, Bilingual Audio Selection)

[HDD] [RAM]
Both main and secondary audio can be recorded.
You can change the audio during playback.
(➡ 36, Changing audio during play)

M1

However in the following cases, select whether to
record the main or secondary audio:
–Recording sound in LPCM (➡ 67, Audio Mode for
XP Recording)
–“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (➡ 26)
M1

M2

Hello

Hallo

Hello
The selected
audio only is
recorded.
If you record from external equipment
–Select “M 1” or “M 2” on the external equipment.

If you record from external equipment
–Select both “M 1” and “M 2” on the external
equipment.

When recording 16:9
aspect (Widescreen)
programmes

[HDD] [RAM]

[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]

16:9 aspect (Widescreen)

Recorded in 4:3 aspect

When you want to copy
titles in high speed
mode from the HDD to
DVD-R, etc.

Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD (➡ 26).
You can copy titles in high speed mode (max. speed is 86X§); however, the following settings are necessary
before recording to the HDD.
§
Depending on the disc, max. speed may vary.
Setup

Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display

When recording digital
broadcasts

Record to the HDD

Settings for Recording
Recording time in EP mode EP (8 Hours)
Rec for High Speed Copy
On

DVD Speed for High Speed Copy Maximum

HDD
High speed copy to DVD-R, etc.

It is not possible to record digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R,
+RW or 8 cm DVD-RAM discs. Use the HDD or CPRM (➡ 81) compatible DVD-RAM.
[RAM] CPRM compatible discs only.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]

Y

[HDD]

k

(Y: Can do, t: Cannot do)

≥“One time only recording” titles can only be transferred from the HDD to CPRM compatible DVD-RAM (They
are deleted from the HDD). They cannot be copied.
≥Even when copying to videotape the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard.
≥You cannot copy a playlist created from “One time only recording” titles.

Playing the disc on
other DVD players

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
The disc must be finalized after recording or copying (➡ 62).
It is necessary to finalize DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play
them as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record
or copy.§
§
You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.
Record to DVD-R, etc.

Play on other DVD equipment

CHG

Í /I

Í

DOUBLE RE-MASTER CD SEQUENTIAL

SEARCH

ENTER
VOL
DISPLAY
TOP

Finalize

MENU
RETURN
MENU

ON

OFF

DC

IN

9V

OPEN
UND
A.SURRO

REPEAT

MODE
MONITOR
MODE
PICTURE

Recording to DVD-R DL
and +R DL

You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.

≥It is not possible to record to both HDD (Hard Disk Drive) and DVD drive simultaneously.
RQT8415

8

DISC

1

2

3

4

5

∫

;

1

:/6

5/9

DISC EXCHANGE

DISC SKIP



MANUAL SKIP

REC

REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC

AUDIO

STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP

H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O

RQT8415

12

;
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O

Turn the unit on (➡ 18)
Select drive (HDD, DVD or SD) (➡ 24, 34, 40)
Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
Cancel
Basic operations for recording and play
Show programme information in the GUIDE Plus+ system
Selection/Enter, Frame-by-frame (➡ 36)
Show Top menu/Direct Navigator (➡ 34, 35, 44)
Show sub menu (➡ 44)
Colour buttons for switching between Video/Picture and Video/
Playlists, selecting character type when entering text, manual
tuning settings and GUIDE Plus+ operations
(➡ 29, 34, 53, 63, 69)
Start recording (➡ 24)
Change recording mode (➡ 24)
Select audio (➡ 36)
Show status messages (➡ 43)
Transmit the remote control signal
Television operations (➡ 23)
Channel select/Change pages in the GUIDE Plus+ system
(➡ 24, 29)
Show SHOWVIEW screen (➡ 30)
Input select (AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV) (➡ 33, 58)
Delete items (➡ 50)
Show timer recording programme screen (➡ 30)
Show the GUIDE Plus+ screen (➡ 19, 28)
Show FUNCTIONS window (➡ 64)
Return to previous screen
Create chapter (➡ 36)
Skip 30 seconds forward (➡ 36)
Direct TV recording (➡ 59)
Linked timer recordings with external equipment (➡ 33)
Skip the specified time (➡ 36)
Show on-screen menu (➡ 42)
Recording functions

[Note]
≥Buttons such as the [¥ REC] button do not protrude as much as
other buttons to stop them from being pressed accidentally.
≥If you press [EXT LINK] accidentally, the unit turns off and switches
to recording standby mode. Press [EXT LINK] again to cancel
recording standby.
≥The word “button” is not used in these operating instructions so
“Press the [ENTER] button.” is shown as “Press [ENTER].”
≥You can use this remote control to operate your television if you set
the television manufacturer code (➡ 23).

EH55.book

Page 13 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Main unit
5

4

OPEN/CLOSE

EXT LINK

DV IN

REC

DRIVE
SELECT

k1.3
1.3

CH

S VIDEO IN VIDEO IN L/MONO -AUDIO IN- R
AV3

6
7 8

Opening the front panel

9 :

;

<

=

>

Press down on the
part with your finger
1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (➡ 18)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of power.
2 Disc tray (➡ 24, 34)
3 Connection for digital video (DV) camcorder (➡ 58)
4 SD card slot (➡ below)
5 Display (➡ below)
6 Connection for camcorder etc. (➡ 58)
7 Linked timer recordings with external equipment (➡ 33)
8 Channel select (➡ 24)

9 Open/close disc tray (➡ 24, 34)
: Select drive (➡ 24, 34, 40)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
; Stop (➡ 24, 35)
< Start play (➡ 34)
= Start recording (➡ 24)/Specify a time to stop recording (➡ 26)
> Remote control signal sensor

Control reference guide

3

2

1

Rear panel terminals (➡ 14, 15)

Inserting, Removing the SD card
When the card indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the card is being read from or written to. Do not turn off the unit or remove the card.
Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the card’s contents.
≥Inserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction.
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB (➡ 7).
Opening the cover
Press the protruding
part to open the
cover.

Inserting the card

Removing the card

Press on the centre of the
card until it clicks into
place.

If you are using a
miniSDTM card, insert it
into the miniSDTM card
adaptor that comes
with the card.
Insert and remove this
adaptor from the unit.

1 Press on the centre of
the card.
2 Pull it straight out.

Closing the cover
Press down.

ADAPTER

Insert the card label up with
the cut-off corner on the right.
(Do not forget to close the cover. ➡ right)
Automatic drive select function
≥If you insert an SD card while the unit is stopped, the “SD Card” screen is displayed. Select an item and press [ENTER] to switch to the SD drive
( ➡ 40, 56).
If you remove an SD card, the HDD drive is automatically selected.

The unit’s display
2

1

3

REC

PLAY
6

4
5

8

7

1 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator
2

Recording

REC

Playback

Recording/Playback

PLAY

PLAY

REC

3 Timer recording indicator
4 Lights when the SD card is inserted in the card slot.
5 Lights when a disc that is supported by this unit is inserted in the
tray.

6 Lights when the HDD, DVD or SD drive is selected
7 Main display section
8 Recording mode

RQT8415

13

EH55.book

Page 14 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

STEP 1 Connection
Make sure to use the pair of supplied RF coaxial cables
Use the pair of supplied RF coaxial cables only when you make connections to the unit through its RF IN and RF OUT terminals. Striping may
appear and disrupt images on the TV if you use different cables for connection.

Using a 21-pin Scart cable
≥You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (➡ 59).
≥You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television (➡ 81).
[Required]setting] “AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 68)
≥Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.
≥Select the connection pattern that matches your environment from pattern A–D. Confirm connections not listed below with your
dealer.

A

Connecting a television

To the aerial
Aerial
cable

1

Television’s rear panel
VHF/UHF
RF IN

RF coaxial
cable
(included)

To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)

AV IN

RF coaxial
cable
(included)

2

Connecting a terminal other
than the 21-pin Scart terminal
(➡ 16)

3

AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.

Fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable

4

Cooling fan

RF
IN

RF
OUT

OUT

AV1 (TV)
PB

Y

PR
AV4 IN

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

OPTICAL

R-AUDIO-L

AV2 (DECODER/EXT)

VIDEO

S VIDEO

AC IN

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)

This unit’s rear panel

B

Connecting a television and VCR
Television’s rear panel

To the aerial

VHF/UHF
RF IN

4

To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)

AV IN

RF coaxial
cable
(included)

Connecting a terminal other
than the 21-pin Scart terminal
(➡ 16)
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.

5
Fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable

6

Cooling fan

RF
IN

RF
OUT

OUT

AV1 (TV)
Y

PB

PR
AV4 IN

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

OPTICAL

R-AUDIO-L

AV2 (DECODER/EXT)

VIDEO

S VIDEO

AC IN

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)

This unit’s rear panel
RF coaxial cable
(included)

2

3

1

21-pin Scart
cable

Aerial
cable

Connect the unit directly to the television
If you connect the unit through an AV selector or video cassette
recorder to the television, video signal will be affected by copyright
protection systems and the picture may not be shown correctly.
Television

Television

This unit

VCR

VCR

This unit

AV OUT

VHF/UHF
RF IN

RF OUT

VCR’s rear panel

RQT8415

14

[Required]setting]
“AV2 Input” and “AV2 Connection” settings in the Setup
menu (➡ 68)

≥When connecting to a television with a built-in VCR
Connect to the input terminals on the television side if there are
both television and VCR input terminals.

C

Page 15 Thursday, January 19, 2006

Connecting a television and digital/satellite receiver or decoder

To the aerial
Aerial
cable

1

1:58 PM

Television’s rear panel
VHF/UHF
RF IN

RF coaxial
cable
(included)

To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)

AV IN

RF coaxial
cable
(included)

2

Connecting a terminal other
than the 21-pin Scart terminal
(➡ 16)
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.

3

Fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable

5

Cooling fan

STEP 1 Connection

EH55.book

RF
IN

RF
OUT

OUT

AV1 (TV)
PB

Y

PR
AV4 IN

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

OPTICAL

R-AUDIO-L

AV2 (DECODER/EXT)

VIDEO

S VIDEO

AC IN

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)

This unit’s rear panel
[Required]setting]
“AV2 Input” and “AV2 Connection” settings in the Setup
menu (➡ 68)
When you wish to view another programme this unit
is recording while watching a decoded broadcast
Press [0]i[ENTER]. (“DVD” appears on the unit’s
display.) Press again to cancel. (“TV” appears on the
unit’s display.)

4
21-pin Scart cable

AV OUT

Digital/satellite receiver
or decoder’s rear panel

D

Connecting a television and VCR, digital/satellite receiver or decoder
Television’s rear panel

To the aerial

VHF/UHF
RF IN

AV IN

RF coaxial
cable
(included)

5

Connecting a terminal other
than the 21-pin Scart terminal
(➡ 16)

6

To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)

AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.

Fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable

Cooling fan

7

RF
IN

RF
OUT

OUT

AV1 (TV)
Y

PB

PR
AV4 IN

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

OPTICAL

R-AUDIO-L

AV2 (DECODER/EXT)

VIDEO

S VIDEO

AC IN

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)

This unit’s rear panel

1

RF coaxial
cable
(included)

21-pin Scart cable

2

4

3

Aerial
cable
AV OUT

VCR’s rear
panel

VHF/UHF
RF IN

AV IN

RF OUT

[Required]setting]
“AV2 Input” and “AV2 Connection” settings in the Setup menu (➡ 68)
Connect the unit directly to the television (➡ 14, [B] )

AV OUT

Digital/satellite receiver
or decoder’s rear panel

RQT8415

15

EH55.book

Page 16 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

STEP 1 Connection

Other connections
Connecting a television with S VIDEO terminals

Connecting a television with AUDIO/VIDEO
terminals

The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)
Television’s rear panel

Television’s rear panel

AUDIO IN VIDEO S VIDEO
IN
R
L
IN

AUDIO IN VIDEO S VIDEO
IN
R
L
IN

Red White

Red White Yellow

Audio/Video cable
(included)

S Video
cable

Audio/Video cable
(included)

Red White Yellow

Red White
OUT

OUT

AV4 IN

AV4 IN

OPTICAL

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

S VIDEO

OPTICAL

R-AUDIO-L

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)

This unit’s rear panel

VIDEO

S VIDEO

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)

This unit’s rear panel

Connecting a television with COMPONENT VIDEO terminals
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals can be used for either interlace or
progressive output (➡ 81) and provide a purer picture than the S
VIDEO OUT terminal.
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.

Television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN
R
L

COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
Y

PB

PR

If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)
Use component output with progressive “Off” (Factory setting ➡ 68),
even if it is progressive compatible, because progressive output can
cause some flickering. This is the same for multi system televisions
using PAL mode.

Red White

Video cable

PB

OUT

AV1 (TV)
Y

CRT

Red White

RF
IN

RF
OUT

Audio/Video
cable
(included)

PR
AV4 IN

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

AV2 (DECODER/EXT)

OPTICAL
OPTI

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

S VIDEO

DIGITA AU
DIGITAL
(PCM/BITS
(PCM

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Progressive output
This unit’s rear panel

This unit

For progressive output (➡ 22)

RQT8415

16

COMPONENT
VIDEO IN

EH55.book

Page 17 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Connecting an amplifier or system component

∫ Connecting a stereo amplifier

≥To enjoy multi-channel surround sound DVD-Video, connect an
amplifier with Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG decoders.
[Required]setting]
“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 67)
≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not included),
check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.
≥You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.
≥Even if using this connection, output will be only 2 channels when
playing DVD-Audio.

STEP 1 Connection

∫ Connecting an amplifier with a digital input
terminal

Amplifier’s rear panel
AUDIO IN
R L

Amplifier’s rear panel

Red White

OPTICAL IN

Optical digital
audio cable
Do not bend
sharply when
connecting.

Audio cable
Insert fully, with this
side facing up.

Red White
OUT
AV4 IN

OPTICAL
S VIDEO
IDEO

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)

/EXT)

This unit’s rear panel

OPTICAL

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

S VIDEO

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)

This unit’s rear panel

When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This
unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off
[approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)]
When “Power Save” is set to “On”, the “Quick Start” function does
not work.

RQT8415

17

EH55.book

Page 18 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
≥If the Country setting menu appears on the television.
e.g., [DMR-EH55]
Country
België
Belgique
Belgien
Danmark
España

DVD

Í DVD

TV

Í

Í
VOLUME

CH

DRIVE
SELECT

France
Italia
Nederland
Norge

SELECT

AV

Deutschland
Österreich
Portugal
Suomi
Sverige
Schweiz
Suisse
Svizzera
Others

ENTER
RETURN

PAGE

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
0 SELECT

Numbered
buttons

SKIP

STOP

CH

W X CH

RETURN: leave

ShowView

If you select “Schweiz”, “Suisse” or “Svizzera” in the Country
setting, or when the television tuning setting has been set to
Switzerland, the “Power Save” setting menu appears. Select
“On” or “Off” (➡ 68).
Auto-Setup starts. This takes about 8 minutes.

DELETE

SLOW/SEARCH

PAUSE

PLAY/x1.3

After set up is complete, TV aspect setting screen appears.

PROG/CHECK

GUIDE

ENTER: access

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the country and press
[ENTER].

GUIDE

3,4,2,1
ENTER

ENTER

TIONS
FU N C

DIRECT NAVIGATO

R

TV Aspect

16:9 WIDE TV
16:9
4:3 TV
4:3

SUB MENU

RETURN

RETURN

S
CREATE
CHAPTER

SUB MENU

Letterbox
SELECT

MANUAL SKIP

ENTER

REC

REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC

AUDIO

STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP

RETURN

≥16:9: 16:9 widescreen television
≥4:3: 4:3 aspect television
[HDD] [RAM] Titles are recorded as they appear on screen.
[DVD-V] Video recorded for a widescreen is played as Pan
& Scan (unless prohibited by the producer of the
disc) (➡ 81).
≥Letterbox:4:3 aspect television
Widescreen picture is shown in the letterbox style (➡ 81).

3
1
2

Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.

Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect
and press [ENTER].
When television type and aspect is set, the GUIDE Plus+
setting screen appears.
Auto-Setup
Do you want to setup
the GUIDE Plus+ system ?

Yes

Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit on.
When connecting to a television that has the Q Link functions
(➡ 59), downloading from the television starts.
Download from TV
Pos

No

SELECT
ENTER
RETURN

(The above message also appears in countries where GUIDE
Plus+ system is not available. However set up is not possible.)

4

Download in progress. Please wait.
RETURN: to cancel

RETURN

You can download the tuning positions from the television.
This unit’s Auto Clock Setting function synchronizes the time
when the TV channel that is broadcasting time and date
information is tuned.

≥If you want to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Proceed to step 2 (➡ 19, GUIDE Plus+ system settings)
≥If you do not want to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system or if
you live in a country where GUIDE Plus+ system is not
available (➡ 19, Regarding the GUIDE Plus+ system)
Press [2, 1] to select “No” and press [ENTER].
Television picture appears. Set up is complete.

To stop partway
Press [RETURN].

∫ If the clock setting menu appears
Set the clock manually (➡ 71).

∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned
correctly (➡ 69)
∫ To restart set up (➡ 70)
RQT8415

18

EH55.book

Page 19 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

GUIDE Plus+ system settings

3

One of the following screens will appear

Confirm the message on the screen.
12.1. Wed 15:05

Landscape
12.1 Wed

Prog. Type
All Types
7th Heaven

15:05~16:05

The GUIDE Plus+ system is available in the following countries:

Austria/Belgium/France/Germany/Italy/Netherlands/
Spain/Switzerland

16:00

16:30

15:00

ARD
ZDF
RTL
SAT1
***06
PRO7
MDR

Ta... Abenteuer... Fliege-Die Talkshow
... Derrick Heute in ... Bianca-Wege...
Das Familiengericht Das Jugendgericht
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...
... 7th Heaven
Gilmore...
No Data
Abenteuerurlaub

-24 Hr

Aktuell

TIMER REC
RETURN

...

Prog. Type

+24 Hr

info

S SUB MENU PAGE-

GUIDE Display Mode

PAGE+

O

(As of end of February 2006)
≥This service may not be available in some areas in the above
countries.
≥There may be changes in the service areas.

15:30

Time:

If “No Data”
appears (➡ 20,
Editing
programme
lists,
Reference)

GUIDE Plus+ download is completed.

[Note]
You will need to complete Channel reception settings (➡ 18) to
setup the GUIDE Plus+ system.
≥The GUIDE Plus+ system setup will not work if the clock is not
set correctly.
≥The receipt of the GUIDE Plus+ system data is only possible
via the antenna input of this unit. The receipt of the GUIDE
Plus+ data via externally connected satellite receivers or digital
set-top boxes is not possible.

12.1. Wed 15:05

No Host Channel was detected.
Please refer to Operating Instructions.
Press ENTER to continue.

Visit following homepage for more information.
http://www.europe.guideplus.com

1

Setup

ENTER
RETURN

GUIDE Plus+ system is not available.
Check the host channel of your country.
(➡ 21, Host Channel)

Press [GUIDE].
12.1. Wed 15:05

12.1. Wed 15:05

Postal Code

Current Country: Germany

Setup

Data download was unsuccessful.
Next download time slot will be at XX:XX.

This unit downloads GUIDE Plus+ data several times
a day.
Clicking noise may hear at that time.

Press ENTER to continue.

ENTER

0

~

ENTER

9

RETURN

2

RETURN

To download GUIDE Plus+ data, turn off your unit at the time
displayed on the screen or download the data manually from
“Data Download” in the Setup menu at that time.
(➡ 21, Changing the settings)

Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons
to enter the Postal Code of your
location and press [ENTER].
12.1. Wed 15:05

Setup
Yes

STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings/GUIDE Plus+ system settings

The GUIDE Plus+ system provides programme information from
the host station displayed on the television like a TV programme
magazine. Setting up to record a broadcast is easy too. Simply
select the desired programme from the displayed list. You can
also search for desired programmes by displaying only the
programmes in a certain category.

O

Regarding the GUIDE Plus+ system

To stop partway
Press [RETURN].

No

Do you want to setup the GUIDE Plus+ system?
It may take time up to 2 hours.

ENTER
RETURN

It may take up to 2 hours to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system.
≥If you want to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].

≥For further information about operating the GUIDE Plus+
programme list, refer to “Operations in the GUIDE Plus+ system”.
(➡ 29)

[Note]
If your Postal Code changes, you can update this information later in
the Setup of the GUIDE Plus+ system (➡ 21, Changing the
settings).

≥If you do not want to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system
Press [2, 1] to select “No” and press [ENTER].
To download the GUIDE Plus+ data later
(➡ 20, GUIDE Plus+ data download)

RQT8415

19

EH55.book

Page 20 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

GUIDE Plus+ system settings
Refer to the control reference on page 18.

Editing programme lists

GUIDE Plus+ data download

1
2

Press [GUIDE].
Press [SUB MENU].
12.1. Wed 15:05

There are 2 ways to download GUIDE Plus+ data.
–Download automatically when the unit is turned off.
–Download manually from “Data Download” in the Setup menu.

HDD REC PLAY

CH DC BS DUB EXT Link MPEG4

DVD REC PLAY
SD
PC

D.MIX

NET

Prog. Type
All Types
Gilmore girls

16:05~17:05

Time:

15:00

ARD
ZDF
RTL
SAT1
RTL2
VOX
PRO7

Download data automatically
≥The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded automatically when the unit
is turned off.
During download, “GUIDE” appears in
the display of your unit.

Landscape
12.1 Wed
15:30

16:00

... Derrick Heute in ... Bianca-Wege...
Das Familiengericht Das Jugendgericht
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...
Detektiv Duel M... Beyblade

Yu-...

Gilmore...
7th Heaven
Die Abschl... Freunde...
Setup S.O.S Style & ...
...

Editor
ENTER
RETURN

3

DVD - AVCD

Press [3, 4] to select “Editor” and
press [ENTER].

SP - + RWRAM
LP VR
EP SDPC

12.1. Wed 15:05

If you turn on the unit while “GUIDE” appears, the data update is
interrupted.

Editor
Name
WDR

***04
***05

≥If the GUIDE Plus+ data download at 2:50 AM and a timer
recording overlap, you can select which will be given priority.
To ensure the GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded, you can disable
the timer recordings during data transmission. (➡ 21, left column,
Night Download)

Euros
ARD
ZDF
BBC1

***06

On/Off

Reference

On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On

TF1
TF6
FR6
ESPRT
ARD
---BBC1
ARTE

Source
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
O

ENTER

PAGE+

RETURN

4

Press [3, 4] to select the desired
“Name” and press [1].
You can also press [W X CH] to browse through the station
list.

Download data manually
At the data transmission time, you can download the data manually
from “Data Download” in the Setup menu (➡ 21).

16:30

Ta... Abenteuer... Fliege-Die Talkshow

O

The GUIDE Plus+ data is transmitted from the Host Channel (the
television station transmitting the television programme list) several
times a day. Data will be transmitted at 2:50 AM every day.
It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download.

On/Off

To select the stations to be displayed on the
programme list.
Only stations set to “On” are displayed in the GUIDE
Plus+ list.
Press [3, 4] to change the “On/Off” settings and
press [ENTER].

≥Depending on when you set up this unit, it may take approximately
one day before you can display the television programme list.
≥The stations displayed in the television programme list are
determined according to geographical areas.
≥A station that is not registered in your area is not displayed in the
television programme list even if a signal can be received.
≥Once you have downloaded the programme list, reception of data
is required regularly to update and maintain the programme list.
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead during data download.
≥During data download, the HDD rotates and will make operating
sounds.

12.1. Wed 15:05

Landscape
12.1 Wed

Prog. Type
All Types
7th Heaven

15:05~16:05

15:30

16:00

16:30

Time:

15:00

ARD
ZDF
RTL
SAT1
***06
PRO7
MDR

Ta... Abenteuer... Fliege-Die Talkshow
... Derrick Heute in ... Bianca-Wege...
Das Familiengericht Das Jugendgericht
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...
... 7th Heaven
Gilmore...
No Data
Abenteuerurlaub

-24 Hr

RETURN

Aktuell

...

Prog. Type

+24 Hr

S SUB MENU PAGEGUIDE Display Mode

PAGE+

O

TIMER REC

O

[Note]

Reference To set the appropriate Reference manually
If “No Data” appears in the GUIDE Plus+ list for a
station, this station is either not supported by the
GUIDE Plus+ data or a GUIDE Plus+ Reference could
not be clearly assigned (“----” appears in the
Reference field of this station). In this case, set the
appropriate Reference manually.
You can also manually assign the appropriate
Reference even if a station name was not recognized
(e.g. ***06).

Press [3, 4] to change the “Reference” setting of the
appropriate station and press [ENTER].

[Note]
The station names in the Reference list can deviate
from the station list.

[Note]
RQT8415

20

Changes in the station list in the Setup menu (➡ 69) of your unit will
cause all Editor settings to return to the initial condition.

Page 21 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Host Channel

Changing the settings
You can change the basic settings for your GUIDE Plus+ list.

1
2

Press [GUIDE].
Press [SUB MENU].
12.1. Wed 15:05

Landscape
12.1 Wed
Time:

List of Host Channel (As of end of February, 2006)

Prog. Type
All Types
Gilmore girls

16:05~17:05

15:00

15:30

16:00

... Derrick Heute in ... Bianca-Wege...
Das Familiengericht Das Jugendgericht
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...
Detektiv Duel M... Beyblade

Country

Host Channel

Display of the Host
Channel

Germany

Eurosport

EUROS

Austria

Eurosport

EUROS

Switzerland§1

Eurosport

EUROS

France

Canal+§2

CANAL

Spain

Tele5

TELE5

Italy

Sport Italia

SI

Netherlands§3

Eurosport/Music
Factory (TMF)

EUROS / TMF

Belgium§4

RTL-TVI/
Music Factory
(TMF)

RTLTV/TMF

Luxembourg§5

RTL-TVI

RTLTV

16:30

Ta... Abenteuer... Fliege-Die Talkshow

ARD
ZDF
RTL
SAT1
RTL2
VOX
PRO7

It is not possible to receive GUIDE Plus+ data in all countries
(➡ below).
Check whether the right Host Channel has been input.

Yu-...

Gilmore...
7th Heaven
Die Abschl... Freunde...
Setup S.O.S Style & ...
...

Editor
ENTER
RETURN

3

Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
12.1. Wed 15:05

Setup
Postal Code

XXXXX

Host Channel

EUROS

GUIDE Plus+ system settings

EH55.book

Data Download

Night Download

On

§1
ENTER
RETURN

4

Press [3, 4] to select an item and
press [ENTER].

Postal
Code

To enter the Postal Code
The entry of the Postal Code is required to receive
regional data.
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] or the numbered buttons to
enter your Postal Code and press [ENTER].

Host
Channel

To change the Host Channel manually
The GUIDE Plus+ System information is transferred
via the Host Channel. The “Auto” setting is
recommended. A Host Channel is then set by the
system automatically.
1 Press [3, 4] to select the desired station and
press [ENTER].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥The setting of the Host Channel can take some time.
≥To check the host channels of your country
➡ right column, Host Channel

German-speaking regions only
Analogue terrestrial broadcast only
§3 Eurosport now covers the whole Dutch region. TMF will cease
transmitting GUIDE Plus+ data in May/June 2006. When TMF
ceases transmitting GUIDE Plus+ data, change the Host Channel
to Eurosport manually.
§4 RTL-TVI will be available from January 2006, and will cover the
whole of Belgium. TMF covers only Flemish speaking regions and
will cease transmitting GUIDE Plus+ data in May/June 2006.
When TMF ceases transmitting GUIDE Plus+ data, change the
Host Channel to RTL-TVI manually.
§5
RTL-TVI will be available from January 2006. The Luxembourg
line-up is available by setting up GUIDE Plus+ as country=Belgium
with the postal code 9999 (➡ 19, step 2).
§2

≥To change the Host Channel manually ➡ left

[Note]
≥Which channels appear in the GUIDE Plus+ list depends on local
reception conditions. Sub-optimum reception quality can result in
missing or incomplete GUIDE Plus+ data.

Data
To download GUIDE Plus+ data manually
Download Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
The update can take approximately 2 hours.
≥For further informations ➡ 20, GUIDE Plus+ data
download
Night
To select the priority during midnight
Download The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded at 2:50 AM
every day. It takes approximately 2 hours to complete
data download.
If the GUIDE Plus+ data download at 2:50 AM and a
timer recording overlap, you can select which will be
given priority.
On: Data Download
Timer recording does not start or is interrupted for
data download.
Off: Timer programming
GUIDE Plus+ data will not be downloaded.
After recording finishes, we recommend you to
change this setting to “On”.
Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off” and press [ENTER].

[Note]
≥Existing information can be lost by changing the Postal Code or
Host Channel.
≥Entry of the wrong Postal Code or Host channel can lead to the
receipt of wrong or no data.

RQT8415

21

EH55.book

Page 22 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Set up to match your television and remote control

4
DVD
TV

Í

Í

3
6
9

2
5
8
0

PAGE

Tuning

CH

Disc
Picture
Sound

SELECT

Connection
Others

DELETE

5

SLOW/SEARCH

PAUSE

TV Aspect
Progressive
TV System
AV1 Output
AV2 Settnigs

Display

ShowView

INPUT
SELECT

SKIP

STOP

Setup

AV

1
4
7

Numbered
buttons

VOLUME

CH

DRIVE
SELECT

TV operation
buttons

Press [3, 4] to select “Connection”
and press [1].

PLAY/x1.3

PROG/CHECK

ENTER

Setup

DIRECT NAVIGAT
OR

CTIONS

SUB MENU

Progressive

Disc
Picture
Sound
Display

SELECT

RETURN

Connection
Others

ENTER

MANUAL SKIP

REC

REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC

AUDIO

STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP

Off

Tuning

FUNCTIONS

RETURN

S
CREATE
CHAPTER

RETURN

On
FU N

3,4,2,1
ENTER

TAB

Press [3, 4] to select “Progressive”
and press [ENTER].

GUIDE

ENTER

4:3
Off
PAL
Video

6

RETURN

Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press
[ENTER].
Output becomes progressive.

[Note]

To enjoy progressive video
You can enjoy progressive video by connecting this unit’s
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals to an LCD/plasma television
or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan (➡ 81).

1

While stopped

Press [FUNCTIONS].
FUNCTIONS
Remain 70:00 SP

HDD
Playback
Recording
Delete
Copy
To Others
ENTER
RETURN

2
3

Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
Setup
Manual
Auto-Setup Restart
Tuning

Download from TV

Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
TAB

Connection
Others

RQT8415

22

SELECT
RETURN

≥When connected to a regular television (CRT: Cathode ray tube) or
a multi system television using PAL mode, even if it is progressive
compatible, progressive output can cause some flickering. Turn off
“Progressive” if this occurs (➡ 43).
≥Picture will not be displayed correctly if connected to an
incompatible television.
≥There is no output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals if
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu is set to “RGB 1 (without
component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)”.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.

Page 23 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Television operation
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn
the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the
television channel and change the television volume.

Turn TV on/off

TV

DRIVE
SELECT

Volume

Í
CH

VOLUME

AV

Input select

Channel
Select

PAGE

1
4

2
5

3
6

CH

3

Point the remote control at the television

While pressing [Í TV], enter the code
with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,

01:

[0] ➡ [1]

10:

[1] ➡ [0]

Manufacturer and Code No.
Brand
Panasonic

INNO HIT
IRRADIO
ITT
JVC
LOEWE
METZ

Code
01/02/03/04/
45
35
27/30
09
10/15
05/06
31
05/31/33
05/06
31
10
31
05/06/31
09
22/23/31/40/
41/42
34
30
25
17/39
07/46
28/31

MITSUBISHI
MIVAR
NEC

06/19/20
24
36

AIWA
AKAI
BLAUPUNKT
BRANDT
BUSH
CURTIS
DESMET
DUAL
ELEMIS
FERGUSON
GOLDSTAR/LG
GOODMANS
GRUNDIG
HITACHI

2

1
2

Sh Vi
ShowView

1

Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products
close together.
Use “DVD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.

DVD

Í

When other Panasonic products
respond to this remote control

Brand
NOKIA

Code
25/26/27

NORDMENDE
ORION
PHILIPS
PHONOLA
PIONEER
PYE
RADIOLA
SABA
SALORA
SAMSUNG
SANSUI
SANYO
SBR
SCHNEIDER

10
37
05/06
31/33
38
05/06
05/06
10
26
31/32/43
05/31/33
21
06
05/06/29/
30/31
06/25
18
09
05/06/33
08
10/11/12/
13/14
10/15/44
16
05/06

SELECO
SHARP
SIEMENS
SINUDYNE
SONY
TELEFUNKEN
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
WHITE
WESTINGHOUSE

Test by turning on the television and
changing channels.
≥Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows
correct operation.
≥If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for
your television does not allow control of your television, this
remote control is not compatible with your television.

4
5
6

While stopped

Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select “Remote
Control” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select the code (“DVD
1”, “DVD 2” or “DVD 3”) and press
[ENTER].
Setup

Tuning
Disc
Picture

Set up to match your television and remote control

EH55.book

Remote Control
Press “±” and “ENTER” together
for more than 2 seconds on the remote
control.

To change the code on the remote control

7
8

While pressing [ENTER], press and
hold the numbered button ([1], [2] or
[3]) for more than 2 seconds.
Press [ENTER].

∫ When the following indicator appears on the
unit’s display
The unit’s remote control code

Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s
(➡ step 7).

[Note]
Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the main
unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1
(➡ step 7).

To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.

[Note]
≥If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the
one that allows correct operation.

RQT8415

23

EH55.book

Page 24 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Recording television programmes

2

5

3

Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
REC

OPEN/CLOSE

EXT LINK

DV IN

1
Numbered
buttons

Í

VOLUME

CH

4

AV
PAGE

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP

∫

To select with the numbered buttons:
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [5]
15:
[1] ➡ [5]

∫
3 1

TV

Í

k1.3
1.3

S VIDEO IN VIDEO IN L/MONO -AUDIO IN- R
AV3

DVD

DRIVE
SELECT

REC

DRIVE
SELECT

CH

3

CH

REC

ShowView
DELETE

SLOW/SEARCH

PAUSE

PLAY/x1.3

5

PROG/CHECK

Press [¥ REC] to start recording.

ENTER

SUB MENU

AUDIO

REC

RETURN

Recording will take place on open space on the HDD or on
disc. Data will not be overwritten.
≥You cannot change the channel or recording mode during
recording. You can change the channel or recording mode
while paused; however, the recording will then be as a
separate title.
≥You can record while the unit is in standby for timer
recording, but once the time for the timer recording to begin
is reached, any recording taking place will stop and the timer
recording will begin.
≥[HDD] [RAM] You can change the audio being received by
pressing [AUDIO] during recording. (Does not affect the
recording of audio.)

S
CREATE
CHAPTER

5

TIONS
FU N C

3,4,2,1
ENTER

DIRECT NAVIGATO

R

GUIDE

Remaining time
on the disc

≥To record sound using LPCM (XP mode only):
Set the “Audio Mode for XP Recording” to “LPCM” in the
Setup menu (➡ 67).

;
STOP

Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode (XP, SP, LP or EP).

MANUAL SKIP

REC

REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC

AUDIO

STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP

4

See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 8).
≥[RAM] It is not possible to record continuously from one side of a
double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and
turn it over.
≥[+RW] You can create Top Menu using “Create Top Menu” (➡ 62).
Recording or editing on the disc may delete the menu. In that case,
create the menu again.
[HDD]
≥You can record up to 500 titles on HDD. (When continuously recording
for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›]
≥You can record up to 99 titles on one disc.
[+R] [+RW]
≥You can record up to 49 titles on one disc.
[SD]
≥It is not possible to record onto a card.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.

1

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.

∫ To pause recording
Press [;].
Press again to restart recording.
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.
(Title is not split into separate titles.)

∫ To stop recording
Press [∫].
≥From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to
complete recording management information after recording
finishes.
In order to play DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R
(recorded with this unit) on other DVD players, it is necessary to
finalize them (➡ 62).

The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.

2

If you selected the DVD drive

If a station broadcasts Teletext information

Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.

The unit automatically records the programme’s and station’s name
if the station’s Title Page is correctly set (➡ 69).

≥Press the button again to close the tray.
≥When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the
disc from the cartridge.
Insert label-up.
∫ Cartridge disc

The unit may take some time in retrieving titles (up to 30 minutes)
and may fail in some cases.

[Note]

Quick Start (➡ 68)

Insert label-up with
the arrow facing in.

RQT8415

24

Insert fully.
Automatic drive select function
[RAM] [Only for discs with the write-protect tab on the cartridge
set to “PROTECT” (➡ 60, Cartridge-protection)]
[DVD-V] [DVD-A] [VCD] [CD]
≥If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it
automatically switches to the DVD drive when a disc is
inserted.
≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
automatically selected.

1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording & EPG Display
From the power on, recording starts in about 1 second§ after
the REC button is pressed. If the GUIDE button is pressed
while the unit is off, the Electronic Program Guide (EPG)
displays in less than 1 second. (Quick Start Mode)
§Only when recording to the HDD or DVD-RAM
“Quick Start” is set to “On” at the time of purchase.
[Note]
Startup takes up to a minute when:
–You play a disc or start recording to discs other than DVDRAM.
–You want to make other operations.
–The clock has not been set.

EH55.book

Page 25 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Recording modes and approximate recording times

DVD-RAM
Recording Mode

HDD
(160 GB)

Single-sided
(4.7 GB)

Doublesided§1
(9.4 GB)

DVD-R
DVD-RW
+R
+RW
(4.7 GB)

DVD-R DL§3
(8.5 GB)

+R DL§3
(8.5 GB)

XP (High picture
quality recording
mode)

36 hours

1hour

2 hours

1 hour

1 hour 45 min.

1 hour 45 min.

SP (Standard
recording mode)

70 hours

2 hours

4 hours

2 hours

3 hours 35 min.

3 hours 35 min.

LP (Long recording
mode)

138 hours

4 hours

8 hours

4 hours

7 hours 10 min.

7 hours 10 min.

EP (Extra long
recording mode)§4

284 hours
(212 hours§2)

8 hours
(6 hours§2)

16 hours
(12 hours§2)

8 hours
(6 hours§2)

14 hours 20 min.
(10 hours 45 min.§2)

FR (Flexible
Recording Mode)§4

284 hours
maximum

8 hours
maximum

8 hours
maximum for
one side

8 hours
maximum

14 hours 20 min.

9 hours maximum

Recording television programmes

Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.
(The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)

§1

It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.
When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “EP (6 Hours)” in the Setup menu (➡ 66).
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6 Hours)” than when using “EP (8 Hours)”.
§3 You cannot record directly to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs with this unit. The table shows the recording time when copying.
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in EP mode.
§4 When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode , you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW
discs.
§2

≥[RAM] When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM.
Use “EP (6 Hours)” mode if playback may be on other equipment.

FR (Flexible Recording Mode)
You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or programming timer recordings.
The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP (8 Hours) that will enable the recordings to fit in the remaining disc space with
the best possible recording quality.
For example with a 90 minute recording to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.
≥When recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to precisely fit a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc.
≥All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in the display.

REC

Disc Insertion/Ejection
When the format confirmation screen is displayed
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
When you insert a new disc or a disc recorded on a computer or
other equipment, a format confirmation screen is displayed. Format
the disc to use it. However, all the recorded contents are deleted.

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc
for play on other equipment.
Finalize
Finalize the disc so that is can be played
on other DVD players.
Note: Recording or Editing is not possible
after finalizing. This may take up to min.

Format
This disc is not formatted properly.
Format it using DVD Management?

Yes

When removing a recorded disc

No

Press the REC button to start finalize.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.
The disc cannot be played on other
DVD players without finalizing.

SELECT
ENTER

RETURN

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
To format a disc
“Deleting all the contents of a disc or card—Format” (➡ 61)

∫ To finalize the disc
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit.
≥You cannot stop this process once you have started it.
≥If you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a
disc name, select “Top Menu (➡ 62)”, “Auto-Play Select (➡ 62)” or
“Disc Name (➡ 60)” in “DVD Management” before finalizing.

∫ To open the tray without disc finalization
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.

RQT8415

25

EH55.book

Page 26 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Recording television programmes

OPEN/CLOSE

Recording settings for High Speed
Copy

REC

DRIVE
SELECT

k1.3
1.3

∫

¥ REC

1
DRIVE
SELECT
DVD
TV

Í

DRIVE
SELECT
Numbered
buttons

Í
AV
PAGE

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP

∫

VOLUME

CH

DRIVE
SELECT

STOP

CH

ShowView
DELETE

SLOW/SEARCH

PAUSE

PLAY/x1.3

Refer to the “Important notes for recording” for more information
(➡ 8).

1

PROG/CHECK

1

R
DIRECT NAVIGATO

3,4,2,1
ENTER

GUIDE

ENTER

SUB MENU

TIONS
FU N C

DIRECT
NAVIGATOR

When copying in high speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW after you
have recorded to the HDD
If copying a title using the high speed mode to a DVD-R, etc., set
“Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD.
However, the following restrictions apply:
≥When recording bilingual broadcasts, either the main or
secondary audio can be recorded.
–If you do not connect external equipment
Select “M 1” or “M 2” in “Bilingual Audio Selection” in the
Setup menu (➡ 67).
–If you connect external equipment
Select “M 1” or “M 2” on the external equipment.
≥Even 16:9 aspect (Widescreen) programmes are recorded in
4:3 aspect.

FUNCTIONS

2

RETURN

3

RETURN

S
CREATE
CHAPTER

MANUAL SKIP

REC

REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC

AUDIO

STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP

STATUS

4
5

To specify a time to stop recording—
One Touch Recording
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
During recording

Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select the recording
time.
≥You can specify up to 4 hours later.
≥The unit display changes as shown below.
OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00
^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00
,"" OFF 3:00 ,}
≥This does not work during timer recordings (➡ 28) or while using
Flexible Recording (➡ 27).
≥If you change the channel or recording mode while recording is
paused, the time specified to stop recording is cancelled.
≥The unit turns off automatically after the time to stop recording is
reached.

RQT8415

26

6
7
8

While stopped

Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Disc” and
press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select “Settings for
Recording” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Rec for High
Speed Copy” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press
[ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].

To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.

To start recording
≥Recording television programmes (➡ 24)
≥Timer recording (➡ 28)
≥Copying from a video cassette recorder (➡ 58)

To cancel
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter
appears.
≥The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording
continues.

[Note]

To stop recording
Press [∫].

If you do not intend to copy titles in high speed mode to DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW, set
“Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”.

Page 27 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

5

Flexible Recording

When you want to start recording

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Start”
and press [ENTER].

(Recording that fits the remaining disc space)
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
The unit sets the best possible picture quality that fits the recording
within the remaining disc space. The recording mode becomes FR
mode.

∫ Using “Flexible Rec” is convenient in these
kinds of situations.
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an
appropriate recording mode difficult
≥When you want to record a long programme with the best picture
quality possible
[HDD]
≥When you want to record a title to HDD so that it can then be
copied to fit one 4.7 GB disc perfectly
≥You do not need to edit the recorded title, or change the recording
mode when copying, to fit the disc space
e.g., Recording a 90 minute programme to disc

≥Recording starts.
≥All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in
the display.

To exit the screen without recording
Press [RETURN].
To stop recording partway
Press [∫].
To show the remaining time
Press [STATUS].

4.7GB
DVD-RAM

4.7GB
DVD-RAM

If you select SP mode, the programme will fit one disc.
However there will be 30 minutes
remaining disc space.
4.7GB
DVD-RAM

If you select “Flexible Rec” the programme will fit one disc
perfectly.

e.g., HDD
Remaining
time of
recording

HDD
REC 0:59
ARD
M1/M2
LR

Playing while you are recording
[HDD] [RAM]

Playing from the beginning of the title you are
recording—Chasing playback

If you select XP mode, the programme will not fit one disc.
If you try to record a 90 minute
programme in XP mode, only the
first 60 minutes will fit on the disc
and the 30 minute balance will not
get recorded.
≥Another disc is necessary.

XP
SP
LP
EP

Press [1] (PLAY) during recording.

Recording television programmes

EH55.book

There is no sound output while searching forward or backward.
To stop play
Press [∫].
To stop recording
2 seconds after play stops, press [∫].
To stop timer recording
2 seconds after play stops
1 Press [∫].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [ENTER].

Playing a title previously recorded while recording—
Simultaneous rec and play
4.7GB
DVD-RAM

Necessary space for recording
Preparation
≥Select the channel or the external input to record.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.

1

While stopped

2

Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].

3

Press [3, 4] to select “Flexible Rec”
and press [ENTER].
Flexible Rec
Record in FR mode.

Maximum rec. time
Set rec. time
Start

4

8 Hour 00 Min.
8 Hour 00 Min.
Cancel

Maximum recording time
This is the maximum recording
time in EP (8 Hours) mode.

Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and
“Min.” and press [3, 4] to set the
recording time.

≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
≥You cannot record more than 8 hours.

≥You can also change the drive and play while recording. Press
[DRIVE SELECT].

1
2

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during
recording.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title
and press [ENTER].
≥There is no sound output while searching forward or
backward.

To stop play
Press [∫].
To exit the Direct Navigator screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To stop recording
After play stops
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.
2 If the recording is on the other drive
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.
3 Press [∫].
To stop timer recording
After play stops
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.
2 If the recording is on the other drive
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.
3 Press [∫].
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [ENTER].

[Note]
“Chasing playback” and “Simultaneous rec and play” can only be
used with programmes of the same encoding system (PAL/NTSC).

RQT8415

27

EH55.book

Page 28 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Timer recording
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system to make
timer recordings
OPEN/CLOSE

EXT LINK

REC

DRIVE
SELECT

k1.3
1.3

CH

S VIDEO IN VIDEO IN L/MONO -AUDIO IN- R
DV IN
AV3

∫
EXT LINK

¥ REC

DRIVE
SELECT

DVD

Numbered
buttons

¢

Í
AV
PAGE

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP

∫

VOLUME

CH

DRIVE
SELECT

STOP

CH

W X CH

1

Landscape
15.7. Tue

15.7. Tue 15:05

ShowView
DELETE

Press [GUIDE].

ShowView
INPUT SELECT

Time:

PLAY/x1.3

;

PROG/CHECK

R
DIRECT NAVIGATO

Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...
Detektiv Duel M... Beyblade
...

ENTER

MANUAL SKIP

“Blue”
REC

REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC

AUDIO

STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP

EXT LINK

Prog. Type

info

S SUB MENU PAGE-

GUIDE Display Mode

PAGE+

3

Press [ENTER].
Timer
Recording

DVD 1:58 SP

HDD 30:24 SP

Remain

12:54:00 15. 7. TUE

REC MODE
Name

Date

Start

1 ARD 15. 7. TUE

Stop

16:00

17:00

HDD
VPS
DVD Mode PDC
HDD SP OFF

Programme Name

Fliege-Die Talkshow

≥Confirm the programme and make corrections if necessary
using [3, 4, 2, 1] (➡ 30, right column, step 3).
≥When “-- ---” appears in the “Name” column, you cannot set
timer recording. Press [3, 4] to select desired programme
position. After you have entered the information of a TV
station, it is kept in the unit’s memory.

See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 8).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)

S.O.S Style & ...

+24 Hr

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
programme.

RETURN

S

Yu-...
Gilmore...

2

RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER

7th Heaven

Die Abschl... Freunde...

RETURN

SUB MENU

SUB MENU
“Red”
“Green”
¥ REC

... Derrick Heute in ... Bianca-Wege...
Das Familiengericht Das Jugendgericht

TIMER REC

TIONS
FU N C

3,4,2,1
ENTER

16:30

O

GUIDE

16:00

Ta... Abenteuer... Fliege-Die Talkshow

-24 Hr

PROG/CHECK

GUIDE

15:30

15:00

ARD
ZDF
RTL
SAT1
RTL2
VOX
PRO7

SLOW/SEARCH

PAUSE

Prog. Type
All Types
Gilmore girls

16:05~17:05

O

DRIVE
SELECT

Before using the GUIDE Plus+ system
≥The television programme list is not displayed immediately after
purchasing this unit.
≥You must complete initial setup for the GUIDE Plus+ system.
Refer to “GUIDE Plus+ system settings” (➡ 19) for more
information.

TV

Í

You can perform timer recordings by simply selecting the desired
programme from the television programme list.

4

Press [ENTER].
The settings are stored and the timer programme is on.

Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you can use for recording
(➡ 24).
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (➡ 71).

15.7. Tue 15:05

Landscape
15.7. Tue

Prog. Type
All Types
Gilmore girls

16:05~17:05

Time:

15:00

15:30

16:00

16:30

ARD Ta... Abenteuer... FFliege-Die Talkshow
ZDF ... Derrick Heute in ... Bianca-Wege...

Timer icon

“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
Timer
Recording
No. Name

F 01

ARD

Remain
Date

HDD 30:24 SP
Start

DVD 1:58 SP

12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
VPS Drive
HDD
Stop DVD Mode PDC space

15. 7. TUE 19:00 20:00 HDD SP OFF
New Timer Programme

OK

Check to make sure “OK”
is displayed
(➡ 31, Check, change or
delete a programme).

Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.

[Note]
≥If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV System” (➡ 70), the GUIDE
Plus+ system cannot be used.

∫ To cancel recording when recording has already
begun (➡ 31)
∫ To release the unit from recording standby
(➡ 31)
∫ Notes on timer recording (➡ 31)
RQT8415

28

EH55.book

Page 29 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Operations in the GUIDE Plus+ system
Selecting the programme from the desired category

Press [GUIDE] to switch between Landscape view and
Portrait view.
Landscape
15.7. Tue

ARD
ZDF
RTL
SAT1
RTL2
VOX
PRO7

16:30

1

... Derrick Heute in ... Bianca-Wege...
Das Familiengericht Das Jugendgericht
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...
Detektiv Duel M... Beyblade
...

7th Heaven

Die Abschl... Freunde...

RETURN

Yu-...
Gilmore...

S.O.S Style & ...
Prog. Type

+24 Hr

info

2

S SUB MENU PAGE-

GUIDE Display Mode

PAGE+

15.7. Tue 15:05

Portrait
Prog. Type
All Types
15.7 Tue
ARD ZDF RTL SAT1 RTL2 VOX PRO7
15:00~15:15
15:15~16:00
16:00~17:00
17:00~17:15
17:15~17:47
17:47~17:49
17:49~18:20
18:20~18:50
-24 Hr

RETURN

RETURN

The sub menu for the selected main category appears.
Example: Press [3, 4] to select the main category Movies.
The sub category with several movie categories appears
(e.g. All Types, Action, Animation, Comedy, Drama,
Romance, Sci Fi, Thriller, Adventure).

Prog. Type

S SUB MENU PAGEGUIDE Display Mode

PAGE+

Landscape view
1 Press [2] until the station list is
highlighted.
2 Press [3, 4] to select a station.
3 ≥ To view the current programme in the
preview screen:
Press the “Red” button.
≥ To see the full-screen view of the
current programme:
Press [ENTER].

3
4
5

Press [GUIDE] to return to the Portrait
view.
≥Jump ahead 24 hours
Press the “Green” button to jump ahead
by one day.
≥Jump back 24 hours
Press the “Red” button.
You can only jump back to the current
date.

Press [ENTER].
Portrait
Prog. Type
Movies
Action
ARD ZDF RTL SAT1 RTL2 VOX PRO7

(e.g., Action)

12. 1. Wed: 20:00~21:30 The fast and the fury
21:30~23:00 Ronin
23:00~01:15 Noch 60 Sekunden
13. 1. Thu: 19:15~21:00

Der Sturm

21:00~22:30 Speed 2
14. 1. Fri: 22:30~23:00 Mission Impossible
23:00~01:30 Volcano
Prog. Type
TIMER REC

info

S SUB MENU PAGE-

O

Portrait view
1 Press [3] until the station list is
highlighted.
2 Press [2, 1] to select a station.
3 ≥ To view the current programme in the
preview screen:
Press the “Red” button.
≥ To see the full-screen view of the
current programme:
Press [ENTER].

Press [2] to go to the sub category
menu.
Press [3, 4] to make your selection.

12.1. Wed 15:05

Press [GUIDE] to return to the Landscape
view.

To navigate within the
GUIDE Plus+ list.

Prog. Type

+24 Hr

TIMER REC

Tagesschau um fünf
Brisant
Tagesschau
Verbotene Liebe
Marienhof
+24 Hr

Portrait
Prog. Type
All Types
15.7 Tue
All Types
ARD ZDF RTL SAT1 RTL2 VOX
PRO7
All
Movies
15:00~15:15 Tagesschau
Action
Sport
Wildnis Children
15:15~16:00 Abenteuer
Animation
Comedy
Talkshow Other
16:00~17:00 Fliege-Die
Drama
17:00~17:15 Tagesschau um fünf
Romance
17:15~17:47 Brisant
Sci Fi
17:47~17:49 Tagesschau
Thriller
Adventure
17:49~18:20 Verbotene
Liebe
18:20~18:50 Marienhof
-24 Hr

Tagesschau
Abenteuer Wildnis
Fliege-Die Talkshow

O

TIMER REC

To view a
programme for
another day

Press the “Blue” button to display the
list of main categories.
Press [3, 4] to select the desired
main category.

O

TIMER REC

To change stations

16:00

Ta... Abenteuer... Fliege-Die Talkshow

-24 Hr

15.7. Tue 15:05

15:30

15:00

PAGE+

O

Time:

Portrait view

Prog. Type
All Types
Gilmore girls

16:05~17:05

O

15.7. Tue 15:05

O

Landscape view

The Programme Type function lets you display a GUIDE Plus+ list
sorted by main category (e.g. Movies, Sport). Each main category
will contain individual sub categories. The GUIDE Plus+ list for the
selected main category only appears in the Portrait view.

Timer recording

Basic operations

RETURN

A list appears with all programmes of the selected main
category and the selected sub category.

6

Press [3, 4] to go through the GUIDE
Plus+ list.
If you want to change the station, press [3] until the station
list is highlighted and then press [2, 1].
The GUIDE Plus+ list appears for the selected categories for
this station.

To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.

Press [3, 4, 2, 1]
Only current and future programmes are
shown.

To browse through the Press [W X CH].
GUIDE Plus+ list.
To see programme
information
(Programmes with the
symbol)

Additional information (programme name,
programme duration, broadcast time, short
description) is available for these
programmes.
Press [ ] to show and hide the
information.

RQT8415

29

EH55.book

Page 30 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Timer recording
Refer to the control reference on page 28.

Manually programming timer
recordings

Using SHOWVIEW number to make timer
recordings
Entering SHOWVIEW numbers is an easy way of timer recording. You
can find these numbers in TV listings in newspapers or magazines.

1

1

Timer
Recording

Press [ShowView].
ShowView
Record

F 01

Input ShowView Number 0-9, and press ENTER.

Press the numbered buttons to enter
the SHOWVIEW number.

3

Press [ENTER].
Timer
Recording

12:54:00 15. 7. TUE

Name

Date

Start

Stop

22:00

22:30

HDD
VPS
DVD Mode PDC
HDD SP
OFF

Programme Name

12:54:00 15. 7. TUE

Date

Start

1 ARD 15. 7. TUE

Stop

16:00

17:00

HDD
VPS
DVD Mode PDC
HDD SP OFF

≥Press and hold [3, 4] to alter the Start (Start time) and
Stop (Finish time) in 30-minute increments.
≥You can also set Name (Programme position/TV Station
Name), Date, Start (Start time), and Stop (Finish time) with
the numbered buttons.
≥Date
[. Date:
Current date up to one month later minus
l ;:
one day
l Daily timer: SUN-SAT>MON-SAT>MON-FRI
l ;:
a. Weekly timer: SUN>--->SAT
≥You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording
drive.
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the
“HDD” (➡ 32, Relief Recording).
≥You can also press [REC MODE] to change the recording
mode.
≥VPS/PDC (➡ 32)
ON!)OFF (– – –)
If the broadcasting station is not transmitting VPS/PDC
signals, “jjj” appears in the menu for timer programming
under “VPS/PDC”.
≥[HDD] RENEW (Auto Renewal Recording) (➡ 32)
ON!)OFF
≥Programme Name
Press [2, 1] to select “Programme Name” and press
[ENTER]. (➡ 63, Entering text)

Programme Name

≥Confirm the programme and make corrections if necessary
using [3, 4, 2, 1] (➡ right column, step 3).
≥When “-- ---” appears in the “Name” column, you cannot set
timer recording. Press [3, 4] to select desired programme
position. After you have entered the information of a TV
station, it is kept in the unit’s memory.

Press [ENTER].
The settings are stored and the timer programme is on.
Timer icon is displayed in left column.
Timer
Recording
No. Name

Timer icon

F 01

ARD

Remain
Date

15. 7. TUE
New T

“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
Timer
Recording
No. Name

F 01

DVD 1:58 SP

HDD 30:24 SP

Remain

DVD 1:58 SP

HDD 30:24 SP

Remain

Name

ARD

OK

Press [3, 4] to select “New Timer
Programme” and press [ENTER].
Press [1] to move through the items
and change the items with [3, 4].

1 ARD 15. 7. TUE

4

12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
VPS Drive
HDD
Stop DVD Mode PDC space

Start

15. 7. TUE 19:00 20:00 HDD SP OFF
New Timer Programme

ARD

Timer
Recording

Press [2] to move back to correct a digit.

3

Date

12:53:00 15. 7. TUE

2
2

DVD 1:58 SP

HDD 30:24 SP

Remain

No. Name

DVD 1:58 SP

HDD 30:24 SP

Remain

Press [PROG/CHECK].

Remain

HDD 30:24 SP

DVD 1:58 SP
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE

Date

Start

VPS Drive
HDD
Stop DVD Mode PDC space
20:00 HDD SP OFF OK

15. 7. TUE 19:00
New Timer Programme

Check to make sure “OK”
is displayed (➡ 31).

Repeat steps 1–4 to programme other recordings.

∫ To cancel recording when recording has already
begun (➡ 31)

4

Press [ENTER].
The settings are stored and the timer programme is on.
Timer icon is displayed in left column.
Timer
Recording

∫ To release the unit from recording standby
(➡ 31)
∫ Notes on timer recording (➡ 31)

No. Name

Timer icon

F 01

ARD

Remain
Date

15. 7. TUE
New T

“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
Timer
Recording
No. Name

F 01

ARD

Remain

HDD 30:24 SP

DVD 1:58 SP
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE

Date

Start

VPS Drive
HDD
Stop DVD Mode PDC space
20:00 HDD SP OFF OK

15. 7. TUE 19:00
New Timer Programme

Check to make sure “OK”
is displayed (➡ 31).

Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.

∫ To cancel recording when recording has already
begun (➡ 31)
∫ To release the unit from recording standby
(➡ 31)
∫ Notes on timer recording (➡ 31)
RQT8415

30

EH55.book

Page 31 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

To cancel recording when recording
has already begun
While the unit is on

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
recording drive and press [∫].
Stop Recording

Timer recording in progress.
Stop this timer recording?
It will be cancelled if you stop.
Stop Recording

Cancel

ENTER

RETURN

Press [2, 1] to select “Stop
Recording” and press [ENTER].
If you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled. However, if
you have set a weekly or daily timer recording, the recording
will start from the next time the timer recording is set.

To release the unit from recording
standby
≥Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].

1
2

Press [PROG/CHECK].
Icons
F
[
W

Timer recording standby is activated.
This programme is currently recording.
The times overlap those in another programme.
Recording of the programme with the later start time
starts when the earlier programme finishes recording.
You stopped a weekly or daily timer recording. The icon
disappears the next time the timer programme starts
recording.
F
The disc was full so the programme failed to record.
The material was copy-protected so it was not
recorded.
X
The programme did not complete recording because
the disc is dirty or some other reason.
Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording
(➡ 32).
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(Displayed while recording.)
HDD Recording drive is set to HDD
DVD Recording drive is set to DVD

l

SELECT

2

≥Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].

Press [PROG/CHECK].
Press [3, 4] to select the programme
and press the “Red” button.

Timer
Recording
No. Name

≥“F” flashes on the unit’s display for about 5 seconds when the unit
cannot go to timer recording standby.
≥Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is
turned on/off.
≥Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when
playing.
≥Timer recordings do not begin while editing or copying in normal
speed mode (➡ 51).
≥If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains
turned on after recording finishes. It does not turn off automatically.
You can turn the unit off during timer recording.
≥If the unit is not put in the timer recording standby mode at the last
10 minutes before the programmed timer recording starting time,
the “F” flashes on the unit’s display.
≥When you programme successive timer recordings to start
immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the part at
the beginning of the later programmes.
Programme

Recorded

Programme

Not recorded

Recorded

≥(If the GUIDE Plus+ system is set)
The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded at 2:50 AM every day. It
takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download. If you
want to make timer recordings during this time, set “Night
Download” in the GUIDE Plus+ system setup menu to “Off” (➡ 21).
≥If the actual broadcasting times of timer recordings overlap
[regardless of whether they are VPS/PDC (➡ 32) controlled], the
recording that starts first always has priority, and the recording of
the later programme will start only after the first timer recording has
finished.

Date

HDD 30:24 SP
Start

DVD 1:58 SP

12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
VPS Drive
HDD
Stop DVD Mode PDC space

New Timer Programme

≥The timer icon “F” (➡ right) disappears from the timer
recording list.
≥You cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as
even one timer icon “F” (➡ right) remains in the timer
recording list.
≥Press the “Red” button again to activate timer recording
standby.

Notes on timer recording

Remain

Timer recording

1

Check, change or delete a programme

Press ENTER to store new programme.
ENTER
RETURN

Message displayed in the “Drive space” line
OK:

Displayed if the recording can fit in the
remaining space.
> (Date): For recordings made daily or weekly, the display
will show until when recordings can be made (up
to a maximum of one month from the present
time) based on the time remaining on the disc.
!:
It may not be possible to record because:
≥there is not enough space left
≥the number of possible titles has reached its
maximum.
Relief: Timer programmes that will be relief recorded to
the HDD.

∫ To change a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [ENTER].
(➡ 30, right column, step 3)

∫ To delete a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [¢].
You can also delete a programme with the following steps
1 Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].

∫ To exit the timer recording list
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer
recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.
RQT8415

31

EH55.book

Page 32 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Timer recording
Refer to the control reference on page 28.

Relief Recording
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the “HDD”. If
there is no disc in the tray or the disc cannot be recorded on or when
timer recording starts while copying, the recording drive will be
altered to the HDD.
≥The Direct Navigator shows which programmes were reliefrecorded (“ ” is displayed.) (➡ 34).
≥If the time remaining on the HDD is insufficient, as much of the
programme as possible will be recorded onto the HDD.
≥Relief recording is not activated when recording the programme
with VPS/PDC and it is extended so that it no longer fits on the
disc.

Auto Renewal Recording
[HDD]
If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday or every
week using timer recording, the unit will record the new programme
over the old one.
This function can be used only when weekly recording or daily
recording is selected.

1
2
3
4

Press [PROG/CHECK].
Press [3, 4] to select the programme
and press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “RENEW”
column.
Press [3, 4] to select “ON” and press
[ENTER].
Timer
Recording

Remain

HDD 30:24 SP

DVD 1:58 SP
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE

Name

Date

Start

Stop

1 ARD

SUN

22:00

22:30

HDD
VPS
DVD Mode PDC RENEW
ON
HDD SP OFF

Programme Name

[Note]
≥If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or
while play back is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the
programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for
recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this
programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto
Renewal Recording takes place.
≥Playlists made from programmes that were set for Auto Renewal
Recording are deleted along with auto renewal.
≥When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may
not be recorded completely.

VPS/PDC function
VPS (Video Programme System) or PDC (Programme Delivery Control) is a very convenient system which records exactly from beginning to end
of the TV programmes set in timer recording, even if the actual broadcasting time differs from the scheduled time due to delayed start or extension
of the programme duration. Also, if a programme is interrupted, for example, some special news is inserted, the recording will be paused
automatically and resumed when the programme continues.
When VPS/PDC recording

≥Use VPS/PDC time for recording the TV programmes.
≥Set “VPS/PDC” to “OFF” when recording time is not VPS/PDC time.
≥VPS/PDC recording is not performed when VPS/PDC time is incorrect, even if only by one
minute. To find out VPS/PDC time, consult Teletext, a newspaper or magazine, or other source.
–If a programme listed in a newspaper or magazine has two SHOWVIEW numbers, use the
SHOWVIEW number for VPS/PDC if you wish to proceed with VPS/PDC recording using
SHOWVIEW programming.
–The default settings for “VPS/PDC” is “OFF”.

When the VPS/PDC signal drops out
because the broadcast signal is weak.
When a TV station does not transmit a
regular VPS/PDC signal.

Timer recording will be performed in the normal mode (without VPS/PDC) even if it was
programmed for VPS/PDC.
In this case, even if the timer recording is performed, whatever has been programmed will not be
cancelled at that particular time but at 4 a.m. two days later.

If the start times of scheduled
programmes listed in the newspaper or
magazine change at a later date.

Set “VPS/PDC” to “OFF” when programming a programme whose start time has been
subsequently changed.

[Note]
≥The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in some cases.
≥Depending on the signals sent from the TV stations, the VPS/PDC system may not work properly even when “VPS/PDC” has been set to “ON”.
≥Please check with the broadcasters in your area for details.
≥VPS/PDC does not activate while this unit is on. The system stays inactive under the condition even its setting is “ON”. In such cases, recording
starts and finishes at times you set initially.

RQT8415

32

EH55.book

Page 33 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Recording broadcasts from an external equipment
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 8).

Making timer recordings on the
television

To record programmes from digital/satellite receiver using timer
programming

(e.g., of digital broadcasts)

Preparation
≥Make sure you connect the AV2 input terminal of this unit to the
Scart terminal of a VCR or a digital/satellite receiver with a 21-pin
Scart cable (➡ 15).
≥Set “AV2 Input” to match the connected equipment in the Setup
menu (➡ 68).
≥Set the “Ext Link” to match the connected equipment in the Setup
menu (➡ 68.)

To make a timer recording with your television, connect to a
television with a Q Link function (➡ 59) that you can use for setting
timer recordings using a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable (➡ 14).

1
2

Make timer programming on the TV.
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
If you selected the DVD drive, insert a disc (➡ 24).

3

1

Turn off this unit.

The start and end of recording is controlled by the TV.
To stop recording
Press [∫].

[Note]
≥When this unit is in timer recording standby or EXT LINK standby
(“F” or “EXT-L” is shown on the unit’s display), recording from
television does not start.
≥Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end
time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later
timer recording are close to each other.
[HDD] [RAM] To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (➡ 45).

2

Make timer programming on the
external equipment.
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
If you selected the DVD drive, insert a disc (➡ 24).

3

Press [EXT LINK].
The unit turns off and “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display to
indicate timer recording standby has been activated.

To cancel the external control
Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or to cancel linked timer
recording standby.
≥In order to prevent accidental operation, press [EXT LINK] to
cancel the setting after recording is finished.

[Note]

Recording from digital/satellite receiver
or decoder
Preparation
≥Connect a digital/satellite receiver or decoder to this unit’s input
terminals (➡ 15).
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 70).
This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC
signals. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded
onto the HDD.)
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.

1

While stopped

Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.

≥This function does not work with some equipment. Refer to the
equipment’s operating instructions.
≥The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in
some cases.
≥When “Ext Link” is set to “Ext Link 2”, this function does not work if
the input signal is NTSC system.
≥When “AV2 Connection” is set to “Decoder”, EXT LINK is not
available (➡ 68).
≥Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end
time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later
timer recording are close to each other.
[HDD] [RAM] To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (➡ 45).
≥When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” is shown on the
unit’s display), The GUIDE Plus+ data cannot downloaded.
≥While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or recording, video
picture is from the AV2 input terminal irrespective of “AV1 Output”
setting (➡ 68).
≥During EXT LINK standby mode or recording, playback is only
available from the drive performing the recording.

Timer recording/Recording broadcasts from an external equipment

Linked timer recordings with external
equipment (digital/satellite receiver) —
EXT LINK

e.g.,If you have connected to AV2 input terminals, select “AV2”.

2
3
4

Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode.
Select the channel on the other
equipment.
Press [¥ REC].
Recording starts.

To skip unwanted parts
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
To stop recording
Press [∫].

RQT8415

33

EH55.book

Page 34 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—
Direct Navigator

2

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
OPEN/CLOSE

REC

DRIVE
SELECT

k1.3
1.3

DVD

Í

1
Numbered
buttons

1 3

Í

3

PLAY/x1.3

;

DIRECT NAVIGATO

R

GUIDE

ENTER

SUB MENU

2;, ;1

RETURN

RETURN

S
CREATE
CHAPTER

MANUAL SKIP

REC

REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC

MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CHAPTER
TIME SLIP

AUDIO

STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP

AUDIO

16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the
following cases.
–If you recorded to the HDD or a DVD-RAM and “Rec for High
Speed Copy” was set to “On” in the Setup menu (➡ 66).
–If you recorded or copied to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to
your television’s operating instructions.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
≥It is possible to watch playback from one drive while
recording on another (editing is not possible).

2

Rec time
0:52(SP)

---

If you selected the DVD drive

Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
≥Press the button again to close the tray.
≥When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the
disc from the cartridge.
Insert label-up.
∫ Cartridge disc

Page 02/02

S SUB MENU

Select

Title View

HDD
No.
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
---

Name
ARD
ZDF
AV2
ARD
AV2
ZDF
ARD
ARD

Next
Previous

VIDEO

PICTURE

Date Day Time Name of title
26. 9. FRI 13:30
27. 9. SAT 12:15
3. 10. FRI 20:00
3. 10. FRI 22:05
4. 10. SAT 16:10
10.10. FRI 9:25
10.10. FRI 13:30
11.10. SAT 21:00

Page 01/01
ENTER

Next

RETURN

S SUB MENU

Select

Switching the Direct Navigator appearance
1 Press [SUB MENU] while Thumbnail Display is displayed.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Table Display” and press [ENTER].
≥The display appearance last used is saved even after the unit is
turned off.

DELETE

“Red”

1

ARD 11.10. SAT

---

Previous

TIONS
FU N C

SUB MENU

ARD 10.10. FRI

RETURN

SLOW/SEARCH

PAUSE

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

PICTURE

---

008

---

ENTER

ShowView

6, 5
STOP

VIDEO

≥Table Display

CH

PROG/CHECK

3,4,2,1
ENTER

007

AV

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
0 SELECT

Title View

HDD

VOLUME

CH

SKIP

DIRECT
NAVIGATOR,
“Top Menu”

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

PAGE

:, 9
∫

≥Thumbnail Display

∫

TV

DRIVE
SELECT

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

2

[HDD] [RAM]

Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR

Title View

VIDEO

HDD
007

008

PICTURE

---

[HDD] To sort Title View for easy searching (Table Display only)
This function is convenient when searching for one title to
playback from many titles.
1 Press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [ENTER].
If you select an item other than “No.”
≥The Direct Navigator screen will reappear after playback of the
selected title has finished. (You cannot play titles continuously.)
≥Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being
played back.
≥If you exit the Direct Navigator screen, or switch to “PICTURE”
Direct Navigator screen, the sorted Title View will be cancelled.

3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title and press
[ENTER].
You can also select titles with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
[HDD]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
5:
[0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
15:
[1] ➡ [5]
115:
[1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER]. (Thumbnail Display only)
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Direct Navigator screen icons
[
Currently recording.
Title protected.
Title that was not recorded due to recording
protection (Digital broadcasts etc.)

t
Insert label-up with
the arrow facing in.

Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(➡ 32, Relief Recording)

Insert fully.

Title with “One time only recording” restriction
(➡ 81, CPRM)

Automatic drive select function (➡ 24)

3

Press [1] (PLAY).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Play starts from the most recently recorded title.
[DVD-V] [DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] and MP3
Play starts from the beginning of the disc.
DivX
DivX Menu screen appears (➡ 38)

RQT8415

34

≥When using cartridge discs with the write-protect tab in the
protect position (➡ 60), play automatically starts when
inserted in the unit.

Title cannot be played
[When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is
damaged etc.]

(NTSC)
(PAL)

Title recorded using a different encoding system
from that of the TV system currently selected on the
unit.
≥Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit
(➡ 70).

EH55.book

Page 35 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

∫ When a menu screen appears on the television

≥To return to the menu screen
[DVD-V] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] or [SUB MENU].
[DVD-A] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[VCD] Press [RETURN].

[Note]
≥It is not possible to play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and turn it over.
≥Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen, pictures, sound, etc. to start.
≥Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [∫] when you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your television screen
and so on.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you match the “TV System” setting to the recorded title (➡ 70).

Operations during play
Stop

Press [∫].
The stopped position is memorized.
Resume play function
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
Stopped position
≥If [∫] is pressed several times, the position is cleared.
≥The position is cleared if the tray is opened.
≥[DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] and MP3/DivX :The position is cleared if the unit is turned off.

Pause

Press [;].

Search

Press [6] or [5].

Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs

[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [ENTER].
Some items can also be selected using the numbered buttons.
[VCD]
Press the numbered buttons to select the item.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [5]
15:
[1] ➡ [5]

Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

≥The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps)
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥Audio is heard during first level search forward.
[DVD-A] (excluding motion picture parts) [CD] and MP3 : Audio is heard during all levels of search.
DivX : Audio is not heard during all levels of search.
≥Depending on the disc, Search may not be possible.

Skip

During play or while paused, press [:] or [9].
Skip to the title, chapter or track you want to play.
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
≥DivX : Backward direction [:] only.

Starting from a selected
title

Press the numbered buttons.
Play starts from the selected title, chapter or track.
≥[HDD]
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥MP3 and JPEG/TIFF
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥[DVD-A] Selecting groups
While stopped (screen saver is displayed on the television ➡ right)
Input a 1-digit number
e.g., 5: [5]
≥Other discs (You can select a track with DVD Audio.)
Input a 2-digit number
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [5]
15: [1] ➡ [5]
≥This works only when stopped (screen saver is displayed on the television ➡ above) with some
discs.
≥[VCD] (with playback control)
If you press the numbered buttons while stopped (the above screen saver is displayed on the
television) you can cancel PBC. (Elapsed play time appears on the unit’s display.)

Quick View

Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).

[HDD] [RAM]

Play speed is quicker than normal.
≥Press again to return to normal speed.
RQT8415

(Continued on the next page)

35

EH55.book

Page 36 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
Refer to the control reference on page 34.

Operations during play
(continued)

Slow-motion

While paused, press [6] or [5].

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]
[DVD-A] (Motion picture parts only)
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]

The speed increases up to 5 steps.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥[VCD] Forward direction [5] only.
≥The unit will pause if slow-motion play is continued for approximately 5 minutes
(excluding [DVD-V] [DVD-A] [VCD]).

Frame-by-frame

While paused, press [2] (2;) or [1] (;1).

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]
[DVD-A] (Motion picture parts only)
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]

Each press shows the next frame.
≥Press and hold to change in succession forward or backward.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥[VCD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.

Skipping the specified
time (Time Slip)

1 Press [TIME SLIP].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the time
and press [ENTER].

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

-5 min

Play skips the specified time.
≥Each time you press [3, 4], the time
increases [3] or decreases [4] by 1 minute
intervals. (Press and hold for 10-minute
intervals.)

Manual Skip

Press [MANUAL SKIP].

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

Each time you press, play restarts approximately 30 seconds later.

Create Chapter

Press [CREATE CHAPTER].

(➡ 44, Title/Chapter)
[HDD] [RAM]

Chapters are divided at the point pressed.
≥Press [:, 9] to skip to the start of a chapter.
≥Chapters cannot be created during EXT LINK standby.

This automatically
disappears after
approximately 5
seconds. To show the
screen again press
[TIME SLIP] again.

Changing audio during play
Press [AUDIO].
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX
LR>L>R
^---------------}
HDD
PLAY

LR

[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
You can change the audio channel number each time you press the
button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack
language (➡ 42, Soundtrack).
Soundtrack

e.g., “L R” is selected

1 ENG

Î Digital 3/2.1ch

e.g., English is selected.

[Note]
You cannot change the audio type in the following cases.
≥When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
≥When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (➡ 67).
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (➡ 26).

RQT8415

36

EH55.book

Page 37 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)

DivX
Playable
discs

[-R] [CD]

File
format

DivX
≥Files must have the extension
“.DIVX”, “.divx”, “.AVI” or “.avi”.

Number
of folders

Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300 folders
(including the root folder)

Number
of files

Maximum number of files recognizable§1: 200 files

Support
version

DivX ver.3.11, 4.x, 5.x
Video
–Number of stream: Up to 1
–Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50
–Picture size: 32 x 32 to 720 x 576
–FPS(Frame Per Second): Up to 30 fps
Audio
–Number of stream: Up to 8
–Format: MP3, MPEG, AC3
–Multi channel: AC3 is possible. MPEG multi is 2 ch
conversion.
GMC (Global Motion Compensation) is not supported.

MP3
Playable
discs

[-R] [CD]

File
format

MP3
≥Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.

Number
of folders
(groups)

Maximum number of folders (groups) recognizable:
300 folders (groups)
(including the root folder)

Number
of files
(tracks)

Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable§1:
3000 files (tracks)

Bit rates

32 kbps to 320 kbps

Sampling
frequency

16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1kHz/48 kHz

ID3 tags

not compatible

[-R] [CD]
≥Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended
formats) and Joliet
≥This unit is compatible with multi-session but reading or play of the
disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.
≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders (groups) and some files (tracks) may not
display or be playable.
≥English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.
Other characters may not be displayed correctly.
≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files
(tracks) and folders (groups) may not play in the order you
numbered them.
≥This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
≥Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not play.
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
≥Compatible formats: DCF§3 compliant (Content recorded on a
digital camera, etc.)
§3Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established
by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA).

You can play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) on this unit by
making folders as shown below. However depending on how
you create the disc (writing software), play may not be in the
order you numbered the folders.
[-R] [CD]
Structure of MP3 folders
Prefix with 3-digit numbers
in the order you want to play
them.

Root
001

001 (folder=group)
001track.mp3 (file=track)
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
002 group

003 group

001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
004track.mp3

001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3

Order of play
[-R] [CD]

≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3 file,
play may not be possible.

Structures of still pictures
Files inside a folder are displayed
in the order they were updated or
taken.

Root
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
001

P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg

Still pictures (JPEG, TIFF§2)
Playable
discs and
cards

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [CD] [SD]

File
format

File format: JPEG, TIFF (non-compressed RGB
chunky format)
≥Files must have the extension “.jpg”, “.JPG”, “.tif” or
“.TIF”.

Number
of pixels

34k34 to 6144k4096
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)

Number
of folders

[-R] [CD] Maximum number of folders
recognizable:300 folders (including the root folder)
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of
300 folders (including higher folders)

Number
of files

[-R] [CD] Maximum number of files
recognizable§1:3000 files
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of
3000 files

MOTION
JPEG

not supported

§1

Total number of recognizable file including MP3, JPEG, DivX and
other type of files is 4000.

§2

Operation may take time to complete when playing TIFF format
still pictures, or when there are many files and/or folders, some
files may not display or be playable.

≥When the highest level folders
are “DCIM” folders, they are
displayed first on the tree.

002 Folder

003 Folder
004 Folder

Order of play

P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg

P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg

Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs/Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)

Regarding DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)

RQT8415

37

EH55.book

Page 38 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)

Playing DivX discs
DVD

Í DVD

TV

Í

Í
VOLUME

CH

DRIVE
SELECT

DRIVE SELECT

[-R] [CD]
You can play DVD-R and CD-R/CD-RW discs which contain DivX
video contents that have been recorded on a computer.

AV
PAGE

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
0 SELECT

Numbered
buttons

SKIP

Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

CH

1

ShowView
DELETE

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

6, 5

∫

STOP

PAUSE

PLAY/x1.3

Folder1 : 00025

DivX Menu
CD (DivX)

SLOW/SEARCH

:, 9

001

Tree

Name of Title

No.
ABC.avi

1

PROG/CHECK

GUIDE

R

Page

DIRECT NAVIGATO

3,4,2,1
ENTER

ENTER

SUB MENU

TIONS
FU N C

DIRECT
NAVIGATOR

CREATE
CHAPTER

STAUTS

MANUAL SKIP

REC

REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC

AUDIO

STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP

Total Title : 001

RETURN

≥Files are treated as titles.
≥When the MP3 or JPEG Menu is displayed, perform steps
1–4 in “To select file type” on the left column selecting “DivX”
in step 4 to change the playback mode.

RETURN

S

SUB MENU

001/001

ENTER

FUNCTIONS

RETURN
“Green”

2

Press [3, 4] to select the title and
press [ENTER].
Play starts on the selected title.
≥You can also select the title with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

Selecting file type to play
[-R] [CD]
You can play DVD-R and CD-R/CD-RW discs which contain MP3
files, DivX video contents or still pictures that have been recorded on
a computer.
The screen shown below is displayed when you insert a disc
containing DivX video contents, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG/
TIFF).
e.g.,
Play mode is set to DivX.
To play another type of file,
select the file type
from Menu in FUNCIONS.

≥When playing the file displayed on the screen
Press [ENTER].
≥When you want to play files other than the one displayed on the
screen
Follow the steps below.

To stop playing
Press [∫].
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

[Note]
≥Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from
showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to
adjust the aspect through the TV.
≥Successive play is not possible.
≥Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD
drive.

To select file type

1 Press [RETURN].
2 Press [FUNCTIONS].
FUNCTIONS
CD(DivX/MP3/JPEG)
Menu

Play Mode : DivX

Menu
Recording

Copy
To Others

Using the tree screen to find a folder

1

While the file list is displayed

Press [1] while a title is highlighted to display
the tree screen.
F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX title.
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)

Folder

F 1/21

ENTER

12.02.2004
Image001
Image002
Image003
Image004
Image005
Image006
Image007
Image008
Image009
Image010
DATA1
DATA2

RETURN

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Menu” and press
[ENTER].
ENTER
RETURN

Menu
Select file type.
DivX
MP3

2 Press [3, 4] to select a folder and press [ENTER].
The file list for the folder appears.

JPEG

4 Press [3, 4] to select playback mode and press
[ENTER].

RQT8415

38

If “DivX” is selected: Go to “Playing DivX discs” step 2 in the right
column.
If “MP3” is selected: Go to “Playing MP3 discs” step 2
on page 39.
If “JPEG” is selected: Go to “Playing still pictures” step 4 on page
40

You cannot select
folders that contain no
compatible files.

To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].

Page 39 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Regarding DivX VOD content

Playing MP3 discs

DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content is encrypted for copyright
protection. In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit, you first
need to register the unit.
Follow the on line instructions for purchasing DivX VOD content to
enter the unit’s registration code and register the unit. For more
information about DivX VOD, visit www.divx.com/vod
Display the unit’s registration code.
(➡ 68, “DivX Registration” in “Others” tab)
Setup

[-R] [CD]
You can play DVD-R and CD-R/CD-RW discs which contain MP3
files that have been recorded on a computer.

Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

1

DivX Registration

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Selected group

DivX (R) Video On Demand
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others

Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX

8 alphanumeric
characters

To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod

Menu
G
1
T
1
TOTAL
1/111

G: Group No.
T: Track No. in the group
TOTAL: Track No./Total
tracks in all groups

Number
0 – 9
Prev.
Next
SELECT

No.
Group
1 : My favorite
Total
Track
Tree
001 Both Ends Freezing
1
002 Lady Starfish
2
003 Life on Jupiter
3
004 Metal Glue
4
005 Paint It Yellow
5
006 Pyjamamama
6
007 Shrimps from Mars
7
008 Starperson
8
009 Velvet Cuppermine
9
010 Ziggy Starfish
10

ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

RETURN

≥After playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another
registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not
use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you
use this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the
content on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content
that you purchased using the previous code.
≥If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code
different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this
content. (“Authorization Error.” is displayed.)

Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of
times
Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.
When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is
displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of
remaining plays is zero. (“Rental Expired” is displayed.)
When playing this content
≥The number of remaining plays is reduced by one if
–you press [Í DVD].
–you press [∫].
–you press [:] or [6, 5] etc. and arrive at another content
or the start of the content being played.
–timer recording starts on the HDD.
–you press [DRIVE SELECT] to change the drive.
≥Resume functions do not work.

Page 001/024

≥Files are treated as tracks and folders are treated as groups.
≥When the DivX or JPEG Menu is displayed, perform steps 1–4 in
“To select file type” on page 38 selecting “MP3” in step 4 to change
the playback mode.

2

Press [3, 4] to select the track and
press [ENTER].
Play starts on the selected track.
≥“0” indicates the track currently playing.
≥You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

To stop playing
Press [∫].

Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)

EH55.book

To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Using the tree screen to find a group

1

While the file list is displayed

Press [1] while a track is highlighted to display
the tree screen.
Selected group No. /Total groups
If the group has no track, “– –” is displayed as group number.
Menu
G
8
T
14
TOTAL
40/111

Number
0 – 9

SELECT

ENTER
RETURN

Tree
MP3 music

G 7/25

001 My favorite
001 Brazilian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Czech pops
004 Hungarian pops
005 Liner notes
006 Japanese pops
007 Mexican pops
008 Philippine pops
009 Swedish pops
001 Momoko
002 Standard number
001 Piano solo
002 Vocal

You cannot select groups
that contain no compatible
files.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a group and press
[ENTER].
The file list for the group appears.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].

RQT8415

39

EH55.book

Page 40 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
Refer to the control reference on page 38.

3

Playing still pictures

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View
HDD

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [CD] [SD]
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
(➡ 7).
≥You can playback still pictures recorded onto a DVD-R or CD-R/
CD-RW on a PC.
≥You cannot playback still pictures while recording or copying.
≥Inserting, Removing the SD card (➡ 13)

Album Name

Copy Video (MPEG2)

0003

0004

0006

0007

0008

0009

----

----

----

RETURN

PICTURE

e.g., HDD

Page 001/001

S SUB MENU

Next

Select

You can also select album with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥Press [2, 1] to select the previous or next album.

4

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture and press [ENTER].
You can also select still pictures with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
115: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
1115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

SELECT
RETURN

ENTER

0002

0005

ENTER

SD Card

Album View

VIDEO

103__DVD

0001

Previous

While stopped put the card in the slot, and the menu (➡ below)
is automatically displayed.
Press [3, 4] to select “Album View”, press [ENTER] and then
go to step 2 below.

Copy Pictures (JPEG)

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
album and press [ENTER].

Selecting file type to play ➡ 38

≥Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture.
≥Useful functions during still picture play (➡ 41)

1

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD, DVD or SD drive.
The indicator lights up on the unit’s display.

2

To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
≥[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Album View
HDD
001

---

S

SUB MENU

Slide Show

Album View screen
Recording date of the
first picture in the album/
number of pictures/
album name.

---

Page 01/01

Previous
RETURN

PICTURE

1. 2. 06 Total 3
Date: 1. 2.2006

---

ENTER

VIDEO
---

002

1. 1. 06 Total 5
Date: 1. 1.2006

Next
Press ENTER to show
pictures.

Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the
PC etc., the information about the recording date may not be
displayed. In this case, the date will appear as [--/--/--].
[HDD] [RAM] If “VIDEO” is selected, press the “Green” button to
select “PICTURE”.
≥[-R] [CD]
JPEG Menu
CD(JPEG)
Folder

Picture (JPEG) View
screen

Picture (JPEG) View
103__DVD

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006

0007

0008

0009

----

----

----

Previous

Page 001/001

Next

ENTER
RETURN

(➡ Go to step 4)

Direct Navigator screen icons
Picture and folder protected.
Picture in which the number of prints is set (DPOF)
(➡ 49, 81).
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
To select the still pictures in another folder ➡ 41
RQT8415

40

To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View
screen
Press [RETURN].

EH55.book

Page 41 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Start Slide Show

You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval.

Slide Show Setting

[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
1 While the Album View screen is displayed

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album.
2 Press [1] (PLAY).
You can also start Slide Show with the following steps.
While the Album View screen is displayed
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the desired album and press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slide Show” and press [ENTER].

Start Slide Show

Slide Show Setting

[-R] [CD]
While the Picture (JPEG) View screen is displayed

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slide Show” and press [ENTER].
≥To change the display interval
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 2 and press [ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Display interval”.
3 Press [2, 1] to select the desired interval (0–30 seconds) and press [ENTER].
≥Repeat Play
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 2 and press [ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play”.
3 Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off” and press [ENTER].

Rotate

While playing

1 Press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Rotate RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and
press [ENTER].

Rotate RIGHT
Rotate LEFT
ENTER
RETURN

≥Rotation information will not be stored.
–[-R] [CD] Still pictures
–When disc or album is protected
–When played on other equipment
–When copying pictures
≥If you remove the SD card while the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed, picture rotation
information may not be properly stored. Remove the SD card after you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR
screen.

Zoom in
Zoom out

Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)

Useful functions during still picture play

While playing

1 Press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom in” and press [ENTER].

Rotate RIGHT
Rotate LEFT

≥To return the picture to its original size, press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and
press [ENTER].
≥When zooming in, the picture may be cut off.
≥The enlargement information will not be stored.
≥The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still pictures smaller than
640 a 480 pixels.

Properties

Zoom in
ENTER
RETURN

While playing

Press [STATUS] twice.
18:53:50 11.10.
Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006
Date
1. 1. 2005
No.

3/9

Shooting date
To exit the picture properties screen
Press [STATUS].

∫ To select the still pictures in another folder
(➡ 7, Structure of folders displayed by this unit)
[RAM] [SD]
To switch to another higher folder
(Only if there is a multiple number of higher folders recognizable)
1 While the Album View screen is displayed
Press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Folder” and press [ENTER].

[-R] [CD]
1 While the Picture (JPEG) View screen is displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [ENTER].
JPEG Menu
CD(JPEG)

JPEG Menu
CD(JPEG)

Picture (JPEG) View

Folder

F 1/3

0001

0003

0004

----

----

----

----

----

----

----

----

021216_0026
103_DVD

Select Folder
Select folder to access.

Folder

103__DVD
0002

104_DVD
105_DVD

\DCIM

Press ENTER to set.
SELECT
ENTER

Previous
RETURN

Page 001/001

Next
ENTER

ENTER
RETURN

S SUB MENU

RETURN

RQT8415

3 Press [2, 1] to select the higher folder and press [ENTER].

41

EH55.book

Page 42 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Using on-screen menus/Status message
Disc menu—Setting the disc content
DVD

Soundtrack§
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
The disc’s audio attributes appear.
[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
Select the audio and language (➡ below, Audio attribute,
Language).
[VCD] (SVCD) and DivX
Select the soundtrack number.
≥Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only one
audio type.

TV

Í

Í
VOLUME

CH

DRIVE
SELECT

AV
PAGE

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP

ShowView
DELETE

SLOW/SEARCH

PAUSE

STOP

CH

Subtitle§
[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (➡ below,
Language).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] (Only
discs that contain subtitle on/off information)
Turn the subtitle on/off.
≥Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
[VCD] (SVCD) and DivX
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the subtitle number.
≥Subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not multiple
subtitles.

PLAY/x1.3

PROG/CHECK

ENTER

SUB MENU

TIONS
FU N C

3,4,2,1
ENTER

DIRECT NAVIGATO

R

GUIDE

RETURN

S
CREATE
CHAPTER

STATUS

MANUAL SKIP

REC

REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC

AUDIO

STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP

Angle§ [DVD-V] [DVD-A]

DISPLAY

Change the number to select an angle.
Audio channel [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX
➡ 36, Changing audio during play
STILL-P (Still picture) [DVD-A]
Selects the play method for still pictures.
Slide Show: Plays according to the default order on the disc.
Page:
Select the still picture number and play.
≥RANDOM: Plays in random order.
≥Return:
Returns to the default still picture on the disc.

Using on-screen menus
Common procedures

Source Select (DivX)

1

Press [DISPLAY].
Disc
Play
Picture
Sound
Other

Menu

Soundtrack

1

Î Digital 2/0 ch

Subtitle

Off

Audio channel

LR

Item

3
4

Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select the item and
press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select the setting.
≥Some items can be changed by pressing [ENTER].

To clear the on-screen menus
Press [DISPLAY].

RQT8415

42

PBC (Playback control ➡ 81) [VCD]

Setting

≥Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,
etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you
cannot select or change.

2

≥Automatic: The constructing method of the DivX contents
is automatically distinguished and output.
≥Interlace: Select when the disc contents were recorded
using interlace.
≥Progressive: Select when the disc contents were recorded
using progressive.

Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.
§

With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using the
menus (➡ 35) on the disc.

≥The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot
change when there is no recording.
Audio attribute
LPCM/PPCM/ÎDigital/DTS/MPEG:
k (kHz):
b (bit):
ch (channel):
Language
ENG: English
FRA: French
DEU: German
ITA: Italian
ESP: Spanish
NLD: Dutch

SVE:
NOR:
DAN:
POR:
RUS:
JPN:

Signal type
Sampling frequency
Number of bits
Number of channels

Swedish
Norwegian
Danish
Portuguese
Russian
Japanese

CHI:
KOR:
MAL:
VIE:
THA:
¢:

Chinese
Korean
Malay
Vietnamese
Thai
Others

Page 43 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Play menu—Change the play sequence
This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that
can be selected will differ.
Repeat Play
≥All
≥Chapter

[CD] [VCD]
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[DVD-A] and MP3
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] and MP3

≥Group
≥PL (Playlist)
≥Title
≥Track

Select “Off” to cancel.

Picture menu—Change the picture quality

Sound menu—Change the sound effect
V.S.S.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [DVD-A]
[-RW‹VR›]
(Dolby Digital, MPEG, 2-channel or over only)
Enjoy a surround-like effect if you are using two front speakers
only.
≥Turn V.S.S. off if it causes distortion. (Check the surround
function on the connected equipment.)
≥V.S.S. does not work for bilingual recordings.
Dialog Enhancer
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [DVD-A]
[-RW‹VR›] and DivX
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)
The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue
easier to hear.

Other menu—Change the display position
Playback NR
Reduces noise and picture degradation.
§

Progressive (➡ 81)
Select “On” to enable progressive output.
Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.

Position
1–5: The higher the setting the lower the on-screen menu
moves.

Using on-screen menus/Status message

EH55.book

Transfer§ [When “Progressive” (➡ above) is set to “On”.]
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit
the type of title being played (➡ 81, Film and video).
When the output signal is PAL
(When the tray is opened, the setting will return to “Auto”.)
≥Auto:
≥Video:
≥Film:

Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
Select when using “Auto”, and the content is
distorted.
Select this if the edges of
the film content appear
jagged or rough when
“Auto” is selected.
However, if the video
content is distorted as
shown in the illustration to the right, then select
“Auto”.

When the output signal is NTSC
≥Auto1
(normal):
≥Auto2:

≥Video:

Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
In addition to “Auto1”, automatically detects
film contents with different frame rates and
appropriately converts it.
Select when using “Auto1” and “Auto2”, and
the content is distorted.

Status messages
Press [STATUS].
The display changes each time you press the button.

STEREO
LR

Selected drive/type of disc
The remaining time appears here while
stopped.
Recording or play status/input channel
TV audio type being received (➡ below)
Selected audio type

DVD REC

Recording drive/Copy progress indicator

HDD
REC
PLAY

Title number and elapsed time during play/
Recording mode
Available recording time and
recording mode
Date and time
πRemain

18:53:50 11.10.
π T1

0:05.14 XP

π T2

13:50 XP
0:00.10 XP

Title number and elapsed time during
recording/Recording mode

AV-in NR (Only when AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV is selected)
Reduces video tape noise while copying.
≥Automatic: Noise reduction only works on picture input from
a video tape.
≥On:
Noise reduction works for input video.
≥Off:
Noise reduction is off. You can record the input
signal as it is.
§

No display
≥TV audio type
STEREO: STEREO stereo broadcast
M 1/M 2: Bilingual dual-sound broadcast
M 1: Monaural broadcast

Only when you have set “Progressive” to “On” in the Setup menu
(➡ 22).

RQT8415

43

EH55.book

Page 44 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Editing titles/chapters
TV

Í

DRIVE SELECT

Í

1

VOLUME

CH

DRIVE
SELECT

AV

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP

PAUSE

STOP

CH

2

[HDD] [RAM]

3

Press the “Red” button to select
“VIDEO”.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.

ShowView
DELETE

SLOW/SEARCH

:, 9

PLAY/x1.3

;
1

DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD

GUIDE

R
DIRECT NAVIGATO

ENTER

ARD 10.10. FRI

ARD 11.10. SAT

---

---

Previous
ENTER

SUB MENU

SUB MENU

RETURN

“Red”
REC

ENTER

RETURN

S
CREATE
CHAPTER

VIDEO

REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC

Title/Chapter
Programmes are recorded as a single title consisting of one
chapter.
Title

4
5

Chapter
Start

End

---

Page 02/02

S SUB MENU

Select

Next
Previous

Next

Press [SUB MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [ENTER].
≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
press [ENTER]. (➡ 45)

[HDD] [RAM] You can divide a title into multiple chapters. Each
section between the division points becomes a chapter.
(➡ 36, 45, Create Chapter)

Enter Name
Set up Protection

Title
Chapter

Title View screen

To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

MANUAL SKIP

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]AUDIO
[+R]STATUS
[+R]DL]
DISPLAY[+RW]
TIME SLIP [-RW‹VR›]
(You cannot edit finalized discs.)

Chapter

PICTURE

---

008

TIONS
FU N C

3,4,2,1
ENTER

Title View

007

PROG/CHECK

DIRECT
NAVIGATOR

During play or while stopped

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

PAGE

Cancel Protection

Chapter

Chapter

Properties

Change Thumbnail

Edit

Divide Title

Table Display
Album View

Switching the Direct Navigator
appearance ➡ 34

∫ If you select “Chapter View”

6

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the chapter.
To start play ➡ Press [ENTER].
To edit ➡ Step 7.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Chapter View
HDD

VIDEO

PICTURE

Chapter View screen

008 ARD 11.10. SAT
001

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

0:31.24

≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ above)

7

Press [SUB MENU], then [3, 4] to
select the operation and press [ENTER].
Delete Chapter

Editing titles/chapters and playing
chapters
You can modify (remove unnecessary parts, divide, etc.) recorded
programmes.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connection to this unit.
≥Turn the unit on.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ 60).
RQT8415

44

Refer to “Title
operations”
(➡ 45).

Playing still pictures ➡ 40, step 3

[Note]
≥Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content cannot
be restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.
≥You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.
≥Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.
dividing a title etc).
≥[+R] [+R]DL] Each time you edit a title the information is saved to the
free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the amount
of free space decreases.
We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.

Partial Delete

Chapter View

[HDD] [RAM] You can change the order of chapters and create a
playlist (➡ 46).
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
[HDD]
–Titles:
500
–Chapters: Approx. 1000 per title
(Depends on the state of recording.)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
–Titles:
99 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles)
–Chapters:
Approx. 1000 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approx. 254)
(Depends on the state of recording.)

Delete

Create Chapter
Combine Chapters

Refer to “Chapter
operations” (➡ 45).

Title View

≥You can go back to Title View.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

EH55.book

Page 45 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Title operations
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ 44)

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete titles.
≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded
title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.

Properties

Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.
≥Press [ENTER] to exit the screen.

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

Enter Name
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

Set up Protection§
Cancel Protection§
[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

Partial Delete
[HDD] [RAM]
(➡ below, For your reference)

Properties
Dinosaur
No.
026
Time
12:19
Date 11.10.2006 MON Rec time 0:30 (SP)
Name ARD

You can give names to recorded titles.
➡ 63, Entering text
If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].

Title V

007

008

ARD 10.10. FRI

ARD 11.10.

Editing titles/chapters

Delete§

The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.

You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.

1 Press [ENTER] at the start point and end point of the
section you want to delete.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Exit” and press [ENTER].

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete
HDD
008

VIDEO

PLAY

PICTURE

Start
End
Next
Exit

≥Select “Next” and press [ENTER] to delete other sections.

0:43.21

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].

Start

End

- -:- -.- -

- -:- -.- -

ENTER
RETURN

Change Thumbnail
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(➡ below, For your reference)

You can change an image to be shown as the thumbnail picture in the Title
View.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail
HDD

1 Press [1] (PLAY) to start play.
2 Press [ENTER] when the image you want to use as a
thumbnail is shown.
To change the thumbnail
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [ENTER]
at the point you want to change.

VIDEO

PICTURE

;

008

Change

Exit
0:00.00
Change
- -:- -.- -

Start play and select the image
of a thumbnail.

ENTER

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Exit” and press [ENTER].

Divide Title
[HDD] [RAM]
(➡ below, For your reference)

You can divide a title into two.

1 Press [ENTER] at the point you want to divide the title.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Exit” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Divide” and press [ENTER].

DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD

Divide Title

008

VIDEO

PICTURE

PLAY
Preview
Divide
Exit

0:43.21
To confirm the division point
Press [3, 4] to select “Preview” and press [ENTER]. (The unit plays 10
seconds before and after the division point.)
To change the division point
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [ENTER] at the point where you want to divide
the title.
Divide

- -:- -.- -

[Note]
≥The divided titles retain the title name and CPRM property (➡ 81) of the original title.
≥Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.
§

Multiple editing is possible.

Chapter operations
After performing steps 1–7 (➡ 44)

Delete Chapter§

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].

[HDD] [RAM]

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Select “Combine Chapters” (➡ below) when you only want to delete the division point between chapters.
(The recorded contents will not be deleted.)

Create Chapter

Select the point where you want to start a new chapter while viewing the
title.

[HDD] [RAM]
(➡ below, For your reference)

1 Press [ENTER] at the point you want to divide.
≥Repeat this step to divide at other points.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Exit” and press [ENTER].

§

Combine Chapters

Press [2, 1] to select “Combine” and press [ENTER].

[HDD] [RAM]

≥The selected chapter and following chapter are combined.

Multiple editing is possible.
For your reference
≥Use search (➡ 35), Time Slip (➡ 36) to find the desired point.
≥To find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (➡ 36) and Frame-by-frame (➡ 36).
≥To skip to the start or end of a title, press [:] (start) or [9] (end).

DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
008

Create Chapter

VIDEO

PICTURE

PLAY
Create

Exit
0:43.21

RQT8415

45

EH55.book

Page 46 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Creating, editing and playing playlists
TV

Í
VOLUME

CH

DRIVE
SELECT

AV

DRIVE SELECT

3

Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
press [ENTER].

4

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”
and press [ENTER].

PAGE

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP

CH

ShowView
DELETE

SLOW/SEARCH

Playlists
HDD

Playlist View

--

STOP

PAUSE

--

--

--

--

PLAY/x1.3
Create

PROG/CHECK

--

3,4,2,1
ENTER

ENTER

SUB MENU

SUB MENU

TIONS
FU N C

DIRECT NAVIGATO

R

GUIDE

5

CREATE
CHAPTER

RETURN
MANUAL SKIP

Chapter

Chapter

Chapter

Create

Playlists
HDD

REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC

You can arrange the chapters (➡ 44) to create a playlist.
AUDIO STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
Title
Title
Chapter

Press [2, 1] to select the source title
and press [4].
≥Press [ENTER] to select all the chapters in the title, then
skip to step 7.

RETURN

S

REC

FUNCTIONS

Chapter

001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Source Title
001
002

---

---

Source Chapter
001

003

---

---

---

Page 001/001
002

Chapters in Playlist
-----

ENTER
RETURN

Playlist

Chapter

Chapter

6

---

---

Source Chapter
001

003

---

---

---

ENTER
RETURN

Page 001/001

Page 001/001
002

S SUB MENU

Page 001/001

Press RETURN to exit.

≥You can also create a new chapter from the source title.
Press [SUB MENU] to select “Create Chapter” and press
[ENTER] (➡ 45, Create Chapter)

7

Press [2, 1] to select the position to
insert the chapter and press [ENTER].
Playlists
HDD

Create

001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Source Title
001
002

---

---

Source Chapter
001

003

---

---

---

Page 001/001
002

Chapters in Playlist
-----

ENTER
RETURN

Page 001/001

Page 001/001

Press RETURN to exit.

≥Press [3] to select other source titles.
≥Repeat steps 6–7 to add other chapters.

8

Press [RETURN].
All the selected scenes become the playlist.

1

While stopped

2

Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
FUNCTIONS
Remain 30:00 SP

HDD
Playback

ShowView Record

Recording

Advanced Copy

Delete

Playlists
Flexible Rec

Copy

DV Auto Rec

To Others
ENTER
RETURN

46

Create

001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Source Title
001
002

Chapters in Playlist
-----

Creating playlists

RQT8415

Press RETURN to exit.

Press [2, 1] to select the chapter you
want to add to a playlist and press
[ENTER].
Playlists
HDD

≥Playlists are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much
capacity.
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles
and source chapters.
≥You cannot create or edit playlists while recording or copying.

[HDD] [RAM]
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate Video input to suit
the connection to this unit.
≥Turn the unit on.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
≥[RAM] Release disc or cartridge protection (➡ 60).
≥You cannot create or edit a playlist while recording or while
copying.
≥Playlists must be made in accordance with the encoding system
currently selected in “TV System” (➡ 70).

S SUB MENU

Page 001/001

Press [3] to cancel.

Copying (➡ 51) a playlist will create a title.

[HDD] [RAM]
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
–Playlists:
99
–Chapters in playlists: Approx. 1000
(Depends on the state of recording.)
≥If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the
items entered will not be recorded.

Page 001/001

Setup
HDD Management

To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.

Page 47 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Editing and playing playlists/chapters
[HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹VR›] (Play only)

1
2
3
4

Playlist operations
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ left)

Delete§

While stopped

[HDD] [RAM]

Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
playlist.

Properties
[HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹VR›]

Properties

No.
10
Chapters 002

--

01

12.10. SUN 0:30

Create

--

--

Create

➡ 46, Creating playlists, Step 5–8

--

[HDD] [RAM]

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and press
[ENTER].
≥The copied playlist becomes the newest
one in the playlist view screen.

Enter
Name

You can give names to playlists.
➡ 63, Entering text

Copy§
--

Press [SUB MENU], then [3, 4] to
select the operation and press
[ENTER].

[HDD] [RAM]

≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
press [ENTER].

Change
Thumbnail

Create

➡ 45, Change Thumbnail

[HDD] [RAM]

Copy
Delete

Enter Name

Properties

Change Thumbnail

Refer to “Playlist
operations”.

§

Edit

Multiple editing is possible.

Chapter operations

Chapter View

∫ If you select “Chapter View”

6

[HDD] [RAM]
After performing steps 1–7 (➡ left)
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles and
source chapters.

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
chapter.

Add
Chapter

➡ 46, Creating playlists, Step 5–7

To start play ➡ Press [ENTER].
To edit ➡ Step 7.

Move
Chapter

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the position
to insert the chapter and press [ENTER].

Playlists
HDD

Chapter View screen

Chapter View

Playlists
HDD

01 ARD 12.10. SUN 0:30

001

002

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

001

0:19.36

Previous

Press [SUB MENU], then [3, 4] to
select the operation and press
[ENTER].

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

0:19.36

Next

RETURN

Refer to “Chapter
operations”.

Combine Chapters
Delete Chapter
Playlist View

≥You can go back to Playlist View.

Page 01/01

ENTER

Create
Chapter

➡ 45, Create Chapter

Combine
Chapters

➡ 45, Combine Chapters

Delete
Chapter§

➡ 45, Delete Chapter
The playlist itself is deleted if you delete all
the chapters in it.

Add Chapter

Create Chapter

002
0:10.24

≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ 44)

Move Chapter

Move Chapter
01 12.10. SUN 0:11

---

0:10.24

7

RETURN

[HDD] [RAM]

≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ 44)

5

Date 12.10.2006 TUE
Total 0:30.53

ENTER

Playlist View screen

Playlist View

Playlist information (e.g., total time and date)
is shown.
≥Press [ENTER] to exit the screen.
Dinosaur

To start play ➡ Press [ENTER].
To edit ➡ Step 5.
Playlists
HDD

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press
[ENTER].
Once deleted, the playlists are lost and
cannot be restored.
Make certain before proceeding.

Creating, editing and playing playlists

EH55.book

§

Multiple editing is possible.

To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
RQT8415

47

EH55.book

Page 48 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Editing still pictures

1
2
3

TV

Í

Í
VOLUME

CH

DRIVE
SELECT

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP

≥When you want to create an album using “Create Album”,
press [SUB MENU] without selecting album.

CH

ShowView

Editing a still picture:
DELETE

1 Select the album which contains the still
picture to edit and press [ENTER].
2 Select the still pictures to edit and press
[SUB MENU].

SLOW/SEARCH

:, 9
PAUSE

Editing an album:

Select the album to be edited and press
[SUB MENU].

AV
PAGE

STOP

[HDD] [RAM]

Press the “Green” button to select
“PICTURE”.

DVD

DRIVE SELECT

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

PLAY/x1.3

;

PROG/CHECK

R
DIRECT NAVIGATO

3,4,2,1
ENTER
SUB MENU

To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

GUIDE

ENTER

SUB MENU

TIONS
FU N C

DIRECT
NAVIGATOR

RETURN

RETURN

S
CREATE
CHAPTER

“Green”

MANUAL SKIP

REC

REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC

AUDIO

STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP

≥To switch to another higher folder (➡ 41)

4

Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [ENTER].
∫To edit the album
(e.g., [SD])
Start Slide Show
Slide Show Setting

[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
≥You can edit pictures and albums.
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
(➡ 7).
≥You cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD-R and CD-R/CDRW.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥[RAM] [SD] Release protection (➡ 60, Setting the protection).

Useful functions during still picture
play (➡ 41)

Add Pictures

Enter Album Name

Create Album
Edit Album

Delete Album
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection

Select Folder

Album and picture operation (➡ 49)

[RAM] [SD]
This is only displayed when there are other higher
folders that can be viewed.
To switch to another higher folder (➡ 41)

∫To edit still picture
(e.g., [SD])
Delete Picture
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection

Album and picture operation
(➡ 49)

DPOF
Album View

You can go back to Album View.

To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
RQT8415

48

To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

EH55.book

Page 49 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Album and picture operation
After performing steps 1–4, page 48

[HDD] [RAM] [SD]

Enter Album Name
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]

Set up Protection§
Cancel Protection§
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]

DPOF

§

[SD]

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
≥When deleting an album, files other than the still picture files inside the album will also be deleted. (This
does not apply to folders under the album concerned.)
You can give names to albums.
➡ 63, Entering text
≥Album names input using this unit may not be displayed on other equipment.
If set, this will protect the still picture or album from accidental deletion.

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

Pic

SD CARD
Album Name

The lock symbol appears when the still picture or album is protected.
≥Even if the protection setting is used by this unit to protect an album, the album
may be deleted by another unit.

103__

0001

0002

0005

0006

Editing still pictures

Delete Picture§
Delete Album§

You can select individual pictures for printing and specify the number of prints to be made.

Press [2, 1] to select number of print (0 to 9) and
press [ENTER].

DPOF
Set up DPOF on the picture (JPEG).
Setting on other equipment will be cancelled.
Number of prints
P

ENTER t

1

t

The DPOF mark appears.

To cancel the print setting
Set the number of print to “0”.
≥Print settings (DPOF) made using this unit may not be viewable on other equipment.
≥When this is set by this unit, any settings established by other units will be released.
≥Settings cannot be made for files not in accordance with DCF standards or if there is no remaining space
on the card.

Add Pictures
Create Album

1 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” or “Yes” and press [ENTER].
e.g.,

Create Album

HDD
007

[HDD] [RAM] [SD]

4
3
2
Step 1
Please select album to copy.
---

008

12. 5.06 Total 24
100_DVD

---

12. 6.06 Total 3
101_DVD

---

Previous

---

Page 02/02

ENTER

Next
Previous

RETURN

Next

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album that contains the still picture you want
to add and press [ENTER].
e.g.,

Create Album

Copy all the pictures in the selected album?
Copy Pictures
Copy Album
SELECT
ENTER

RETURN

[RAM] [SD]
To switch to another higher folder
1 Press [SUB MENU].
2 Select “Select Folder” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [2, 1] to select the higher folder and press [ENTER].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [ENTER].
≥If “Copy Pictures” is selected
Select the still picture you want to add and press [ENTER].
≥If “Copy Album” is selected
All the still pictures in the album will be copied.

4 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and press [ENTER].
≥If you want to continue copying, select “Yes” and go to step ➁.
Only for “Create Album”

5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and press [ENTER].
≥If “Yes” is selected:
You can give names to albums. (➡ 63, Entering text)
≥If “No” is selected:
The recording date of the first picture in the album becomes the album name. (If there is no recording
date information, the date will appear as [--/--/--].)

Copy to DVD-RAM

Press [2] to select “Start” and press [ENTER].

[HDD]

You cannot copy if multiple albums are selected.

Copy to HDD
[RAM]
§

Multiple editing is possible.
[Note]
≥Timer recordings do not start when performing “Add Pictures”, “Create Album”, “Copy to DVD-RAM” or “Copy to HDD”.
≥You cannot perform “Add Pictures” or “Create Album” to a higher folder.

RQT8415

49

EH55.book

Page 50 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Delete Navigator
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete
DVD
TV

Í

DRIVE
SELECT

Í
VOLUME

CH

DRIVE
SELECT

1

While stopped

2

Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and
press [ENTER].

AV
PAGE

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP

CH

ShowView

DELETE Navigator
007

PAUSE

VIDEO

PICTURE

---

008

DELETE
ARD 10.10. FRI

ARD 11.10. SAT

---

---

SLOW/SEARCH

:, 9
STOP

Title View

HDD

DELETE

;

PLAY/x1.3

Previous
ENTER

PROG/CHECK

RETURN

GUIDE

S SUB MENU

---

Page 02/02
Select

Next
Previous

Next

ENTER

SUB MENU

TIONS
FU N C

3,4,2,1
ENTER

DIRECT NAVIGATO

R

[HDD] [RAM] To switch to the other view

FUNCTIONS

RETURN

RETURN

S
CREATE
CHAPTER

“Red”
“Green”

Press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”.
Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.

3

REC

REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC

AUDIO

STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP

If you want to delete a title:

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
and press [ENTER].

MANUAL SKIP

If you want to delete an album:

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
album and press [DELETE].

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]
(You cannot delete items on finalized discs.)
≥A title or a picture cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make
certain before proceeding.
≥You cannot delete while recording or copying.

If you want to delete a still picture:

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album
that contains the still picture you want to
delete and press [ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture and press [ENTER].

Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥[RAM] [SD] Release protection (➡ 60, Setting the protection).

∫ Available disc space after deleting

You can confirm the titles or pictures etc. that you have
selected using the sub menu.
≥Refer to sub menu operations for the “Title View” (➡ 44, step
5).
≥Refer to sub menu operations for the “Album View” (➡ 48,
step 4).
≥Refer to sub menu operations for the “Picture (JPEG) View”
(➡ 48, step 4).

≥[HDD] [RAM] [SD] If you delete a recorded title (or a still picture),
the space deleted becomes available for recording.
Available disc space increases after
deleting any of these titles or still
pictures

Title

Title

......

Last title
recorded

Available
disc space

To show other pages
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases only when the
last recorded title is deleted.
Available disc space does
not increase even after
deleting

Available disc space
increases after deleting

4

Press [2] to select “Delete” and press
[ENTER].
The title, album or the picture is deleted.

Title

Title

......

Last title
recorded

Available
disc space

≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase even
after the contents are deleted.

To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.

Deleting titles or pictures during play

1

While playing

Press [DELETE].
You cannot delete a picture during a Slide Show.

2

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [ENTER].
The title or the picture is deleted.

RQT8415

50

EH55.book

Page 51 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Copy
Easy copying from HDD to DVD with no difficult
settings.

Features

Copy direction

HDD ➝ DVD

Y

DVD ➝ HDD

t

Y

High speed mode copy§1

Changing recording mode
Finalize§3
Copying MPEG2 moving pictures on
an SD card (➡ 55)
Copying playlists§4
Are chapters maintained?
Are thumbnails maintained?
Recording and Playing while Copying

t
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Automatically finalized
High speed mode
Normal speed mode
t

t

t
Y
Y
t

t
t§5
t§6
t

Advanced Copy
Make a copy list and then copy.
You can set the unit to copy titles or playlists in the
way you want.
Y
Y
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW]
[DVD-V] (Only from a finalized disc)
Y
[DVD-V] You cannot perform high-speed copy with
finalized discs.
[+RW] You cannot perform high-speed copy from
+RW to HDD.
Y§2
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Can be selected
High speed mode
Normal speed mode
Y
t
[HDD] [RAM] only
Y
Y
Y
t§5
Y§7
t§6
§8
t
Y

§1

To high speed copy titles (or playlists created from those titles), set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD (➡ 26).
However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the high speed mode does not work.
≥Playlists created from titles using a variety of recording modes
≥Playlists created from multiple titles using FR recording mode
≥Playlists mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.)
≥Titles that contain many deleted segments
≥MPEG2 moving picture titles copied to the HDD from an SD card
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode . (Displayed
)
§2 If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does prevent
against degradation of picture quality.)
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in EP mode.
§3 You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”.
If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management” before copying (➡ 62).
§4 You cannot copy playlists with a play time more than 8 hours.
When you copy a playlist, it will become a title in the destination drive.
§5 [RAM] [-R]DL] [+R]DL] [+RW] : One title becomes one chapter.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] : Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5-minutes [+R] about 8-minutes) when finalizing after copying the disc.
§6
Thumbnails return to the default position.
§7
When copying playlists, the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.
§8 Possible only with titles on the HDD
(However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalization or when copying MPEG2 moving pictures on an SD card.)
–You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.
–You cannot play a playlist while copying titles with “One time only recording” restriction (➡ 8).
–Still pictures cannot be played.

Delete Navigator/Copying titles or playlists

Copying titles or playlists

∫ Approximate copying times (Max. speed)

(excludes time required to write data management information)
5X Speed
16X Speed
4X Speed
HDD
DVD-R DL
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
Rec
Rec
Required
Required
Required
Speed
Speed
Speed
mode time
time
time
time
XP
1 12 min. 5x 6 min. 10x 15 min. 4x
SP
6 min.
10x 2 min. 25 s. 25x 7 min. 30 s. 8x
1 hour
LP
3 min.
20x 1 min. 15 s. 48x 3 min. 45 s. 16x
EP (6H)
2 min.
30x
52 sec. 69x 2 min. 30 s. 24x
EP (8H)
1 min. 30 s. 40x
42 sec. 86x 1 min. 53 s. 32x

4X Speed§1
DVD-RW
Required
Speed
time
15 min.
4x
7 min. 30 s. 8x
3 min. 45 s. 16x
2 min. 30 s. 24x
1 min. 53 s. 32x

4X Speed
8X Speed§2
2.4X Speed
+R DL
+RW
+R
Required
Required
Required
Speed
Speed
Speed
time
time
time
8 min. 35 s. 7x
25 min. 2.4x 15 min.
4x
4 min. 10 s. 14x 12 min. 30 s. 4.8x 7 min. 30 s. 8x
2 min. 25 s. 25x 6 min. 15 s. 7.2x 3 min. 45 s. 16x

≥The above values indicate the quickest possible times and speeds to high speed copy a one hour title recorded on the HDD to a high speed
recording compatible disc. Depending on what part of the disc is being written to, the features of the disc, etc., the times and speeds will vary.
§1 In this unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc.
§2 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 8X Speed +R disc.

[Note]

≥When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed.
≥Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.
Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (single-sided, Dual Layer)
and +R DL (single-sided, Double Layer)
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily
copied at normal speed to the HDD and then copied at high speed
to DVD-R DL and +R DL. The titles that were temporarily copied to
the HDD are then deleted.
You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.
–When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When
copying to a new blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc when
copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free space in SP
mode is needed on the HDD.)
–When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles
to be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is greater than 500 in total.
When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may
momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (➡ 5)

Regarding copying of digital broadcasts that allow “One time
only recording”
You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (➡ 81) compatible DVDRAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD.
≥Titles or playlists cannot be copied from DVD-RAM to the HDD.
≥Titles will not be copied if they are protected (➡ 45).
≥You cannot copy playlists created from “One time only recording” titles.
≥Titles with recording limitations and playlists cannot be registered
on the same copying list.

RQT8415

51

EH55.book

Page 52 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Copying titles or playlists
TV
VOLUME

CH

DRIVE
SELECT

AV

3

PAGE

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
0 SELECT

Numbered
buttons

SKIP

Press [3, 4] to select the title you
want to copy and press [ENTER].

CH

ShowView

To show other pages
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.

DELETE

SLOW/SEARCH

:, 9

Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
Press [ENTER] to register.
≥A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

;

∫

STOP

PAUSE

1

PLAY/x1.3

PROG/CHECK

3,4,2,1
ENTER

ENTER

SUB MENU

FUNCTIONS

TIONS
FU N C

DIRECT NAVIGATO

R

GUIDE

After you start copying DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVDVideo format), +R and +R DL discs, they become playonly and you can no longer record or edit.

Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [ENTER].

RETURN

RETURN

S

SUB MENU

4

CREATE
CHAPTER

“Red”

MANUAL SKIP

REC

REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC

AUDIO

STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP

“Green”

STATUS

∫ Speed and recording mode when copying

[HDD] > [RAM] : High speed
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : Refer to the following table.
Rec for High Speed Copy (➡ 66)

Copy speed

Only titles recorded with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “On”.

High speed

Only titles recorded with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “Off”.
When making a copy of multiple titles that
were recorded with “Rec for High Speed
Copy” set to “On” and “Off”.

Normal speed
(Recording mode is
FR.)

Copy starts.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].

∫ To stop copying ➡ 54
∫ COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and
functions ➡ 54
∫ To check the properties of a title and sort COPY
Navigator
1 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press
[SUB MENU].
COPY Navigator

HDD

≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When making a copy that contains titles recorded in “EP”
mode or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode (Displayed
),
copy will be performed at normal speed (Recording mode is FR).

Total : 0

No.
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
---

Rec time
0:52(SP)

≥If the copy destination disc space is exceeded, copy will be
performed at normal speed (Recording mode is FR).

Properties
ENTER

Name
ARD
ZDF
AV2
ARD
AV2
ZDF
ARD
ARD

Destination Capacity: 4310MB
Size:
0MB( 0%)

Date Day Time Name of title
26. 9. FRI 13:30
27. 9. SAT 12:15
3. 10. FRI 20:00
3. 10. FRI 22:05
4. 10. SAT 16:10
10.10. FRI 9:25
10.10. FRI 13:30
11.10. SAT 21:00

Page 01/01

Sort

RETURN

Before copying
When copying a title with main and secondary audio
≥Select the audio type for recording bilingual broadcast from
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 67) when:
–Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL and +RW.
–When “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (➡ 67)
and you are copying in XP mode.
Copying 16:9 aspect titles
The titles are copied in 4:3 aspect if you copy to a DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW.

[Note]
Titles and playlists recorded using a different encoding system (PAL or
NTSC) from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot be copied.
Preparation
≥Insert a disc that you can use for copying (➡ 4, 5).
≥Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.

Copy
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL
are automatically finalized (➡ 81). After finalizing, the discs
become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD
equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.
[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot copy to finalized discs.)

1

While stopped

2

Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
press [ENTER].
COPY Navigator

HDD

Rec time
0:52(SP)

Total : 0

No.
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
---

Name
ARD
ZDF
AV2
ARD
AV2
ZDF
ARD
ARD

RQT8415

Page 01/01
ENTER

52

Destination Capacity: 4310MB
Size:
0MB( 0%)

Date Day Time Name of title
26. 9. FRI 13:30
27. 9. SAT 12:15
3. 10. FRI 20:00
3. 10. FRI 22:05
4. 10. SAT 16:10
10.10. FRI 9:25
10.10. FRI 13:30
11.10. SAT 21:00

RETURN

S SUB MENU

Select

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” or “Sort”
and press [ENTER].
Properties:
The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are
shown.
Sort:
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [ENTER].
This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to
display titles by No., recording date, day, channel, recording start
time and title name. (You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.)
If you close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is
cancelled.

[Note]
≥When copying titles in high speed mode to 5x high speed recording
compatible DVD-RAM or 8x high speed recording compatible DVDR or +R, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than
normal.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal (Silent)” in
“DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (➡ 66).
≥If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from the title
at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them.
To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and
then copy the contents of the list (➡ 53).

Page 53 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Copying using the copying list–
Advanced Copy

6

Register titles and playlists for copy.
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (➡ step 7).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].

[HDD] ,-. [RAM] [+RW]
[-RW‹VR›] > [HDD]
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[SD] > [HDD] [RAM]
You can order titles and playlists as desired for copy to disc.

Copy
Cancel All

Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Size:
0MB ( 0%)

1 Copy Direction

No.

HDD > DVD

Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)

2 Copy Mode
VIDEO

High Speed

3 Create List

See also the notes “Before copying” (➡ 52).

Page 01/01

1
2
3

Create copy list.

Start Copying
ENTER

While stopped

S SUB MENU

RETURN

2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [ENTER].
3 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the
“Green” button to select “Playlists”.

Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
Copy” and press [ENTER].

Create List
HDD

VIDEO
008

007

Copy

ARD 10.10. FRI

ARD 11.10. SAT

---

---

Previous
ENTER

Cancel All

1 Copy Direction

Source

HDD

Destination

DVD

RETURN

HDD > DVD

2 Copy Mode
VIDEO

Start Copying

S SUB MENU

Playlists

---

---

Page 02/02

Next

Select Previous

Next

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the titles or playlists and
press [ENTER].
≥When copying to a disc using high speed mode,

High Speed

3 Create List

0:30(XP)

Copying titles or playlists

EH55.book

0

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] : only items indicated with “

Select the copy direction.

” or

ENTER
RETURN

“

≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]
several times (➡ step 7).

4

Set the copy direction.
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (➡ step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press
[ENTER].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [ENTER].
The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.

5

Set the recording mode.
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]
(➡ step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “VIDEO” and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press
[ENTER].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [ENTER].
6 Press [2] to confirm.

” can be registered.

[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : only items indicated with “
” can
be registered.
≥To select a multiple number of items together, press
[;] to add the check mark and press [ENTER]
(➡ below, Multiple editing).
≥To show other pages (➡ below)
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 54)
You can register a multiple number of titles and
playlists on the copying list by repeating
steps 2–4.
You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size”
(➡ 54) exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not
sufficient).
5 Press [2] to confirm.

7

Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [ENTER].
When copying titles in high speed mode to 5x high speed
recording compatible DVD-RAM or 8x high speed recording
compatible DVD-R or +R, the sound of the disc rotating
becomes louder than normal.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal
(Silent)” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup
menu (➡ 66).

8

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER] to start copying.
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalize” or
“Copy Only” and press [ENTER].
≥If “Copy & Finalize” is selected
After finalizing, the discs become play-only and you can also
play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no
longer record or edit.
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
Press [ENTER] to register to the list.
≥A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
≥When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists” tab, the
check mark is cancelled.
(Continued on the next page)

RQT8415

53

EH55.book

Page 54 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Copying titles or playlists
∫ To edit the copying list

(Continued)

Refer to the control reference on page 52.

∫ To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalizing)
When High-speed copying
All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are
copied.
When Normal Speed copying
Copies until the point cancelled. However titles with “One time only
recording” restriction, only titles that have completely copied at the
point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles that are cancelled
before the copy is complete are not copied and remain on the HDD.
≥When copying to a DVD-R DL or +R DL only the titles that have
completely copied at the point cancelled are copied.
Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVDRW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of
remaining writable disc space becomes less.

∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].

∫ Recording and playing while copying
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed
copying. (Only when high speed copying without finalizing)
≥Still pictures cannot be played.
Press [ENTER] to cancel the screen display.
≥To confirm the current progress
Press [STATUS].

[Note]
≥Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the
HDD regardless of the recording drive settings.
(Only when high speed copying without finalizing)
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL,DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalize them after
copy.

COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions
COPY Navigator/Copying list indicators
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW
(➡ 26)
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) (➡ 26)
(However, titles and playlists cannot be copied in
high speed mode to +R, +R DL, +RW)
Title with “One time only recording” restriction
(➡ 8, When recording digital broadcasts)
Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only
recording” restriction after copying.
(➡ 8, When recording digital broadcasts)
Title or playlist contains still picture(s)
≥Still picture(s) cannot be copied.
(NTSC)
(PAL)

Title or playlist recorded using a different encoding
system from that of the TV system currently
selected on the unit.
≥Titles and playlists displaying these marks
cannot be selected.

Data size of each registered item
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Size:
0MB (0%)
No.

Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)

Page 01/01

Create copy list.

RQT8415

54

Size:
Data size recorded to the copy
destination
≥When copying at normal speed, the
total data size will change according to
the recording mode.
≥The total data size shown may be
larger than the sum of the data sizes
for each registered item, because of
data management information being
written to the copy destination, etc.

Select the item in step 6–4 (➡ 53, right column)
1 Press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
[ENTER].

Delete All
Add
Delete
Move

Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the playlists and titles to be added and
press [ENTER].
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
You can also delete multiple items (➡ 53, Multiple editing).
Move:
Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list.
Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [ENTER].
To cancel all registered copying setting and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 53, left column)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [ENTER].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
–When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.

Page 55 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Copying a finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL

8

When the top menu is displayed

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
you want to start copying, and press
[ENTER].

[DVD-V] > [HDD]
You can copy the content of finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit.
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD
according to the set time.
≥If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while copying, that
portion of title is not recorded.
≥Operations and on screen displays during copy are also
recorded.
≥Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent
illegal copying, and cannot be copied.
≥The following cannot be copied: DVD-Audio, Video CD, Audio
CD and so on.
Preparation
≥Insert the finalized disc (➡ 34).
After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVDVideo”) (➡ 53, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy)

6

Set “Copy Time”.
≥If you are not going to change the setting (➡ step 7).

∫Setting the unit to copy according to the set
time
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting” and press [ENTER].
≥Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [ENTER].
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Copy will continue until there is not enough available
recording space on the HDD.
≥Setting the copying time
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [ENTER].
Copy
Cancel All

1 Copy Direction
DVD > HDD

2

2 Copy Mode
DVD-Video

3

Hour

My favorite

Start Copying

02
Chapter 2

03
Chapter 3

04
Chapter 4

05

06

While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is
reached.)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To stop copying
Press [∫].
You can also press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds to stop
copying.
≥If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.

[Note]
≥The screen saver on the right is recorded at the
beginning.
≥The content is recorded as 1 title from the start of
copy to the end.
≥If play does not begin automatically or if the top
menu does not display automatically, press [1] (PLAY) to start.
≥Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original
picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.
≥If you want to copy a title from a finalized DVD-RW (DVD Video
Recording format), create a copy list and then copy (➡ 53, Copying
using the copying list–Advanced Copy).

Copying MPEG2 moving pictures from
an SD card
Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been
taken by a Panasonic SD Video Camera, digital video camera etc,
can be stored on HDD or DVD-RAM.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
≥You cannot playback MPEG2 moving pictures on an SD card with
this unit.
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
≥You cannot playback or record while copying MPEG2.

00 Min.

VIDEO§

MPEG2

XP

Copy Time

01/02

01
Chapter 1

Copying titles or playlists

EH55.book

Set the time a few minutes
longer.

HDD

Press ENTER to change settings.

ENTER
RETURN

5 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press [3, 4]
to set the recording time.
6 Press [ENTER].
7 Press [2] to confirm.
Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after
the content being played finishes.
≥Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to
include the operation time before play begins.
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.

7

Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER] to start
copying.
The disc top menu is displayed.
≥Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalizing
the disc (➡ 62).

DVD-RAM
§

Conventionally recorded programmes

The display below automatically appears when you insert a card
into the SD card slot while stopped.
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video (MPEG2)” and press
[ENTER]. Then go to step 7 on page 53.
SD Card

Album View
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Video (MPEG2)
SELECT
ENTER

RETURN

How to copy
Refer to “Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy” (➡ 53)
Please set the items in step 4 and 5 as shown below.
Copy Direction:
Source>SD Card
Copy Mode:
Format>VIDEO
≥MPEG2 moving pictures on an SD card are automatically
registered on the copy list.
≥If there are no MPEG2 moving pictures on an SD card, “Copy
Video (MPEG2)” is not displayed.

RQT8415

55

EH55.book

Page 56 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Copying still pictures

6
DVD

Í

Í

Numbered
buttons

VOLUME

CH

DRIVE
SELECT

DRIVE
SELECT

Register still pictures for copy.
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (➡ step 7).

TV

AV

You can register still pictures or still picture folders.
≥Still pictures and folders cannot be registered on the same
list.

PAGE

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP

CH

Copy

ShowView

Cancel All

1 Copy Direction

DELETE

SD CARD > HDD

Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Picture
Picture/Folder
No.

Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)

2 Copy Mode

SLOW/SEARCH

PICTURE High Speed

:, 9

3 Create List
STOP

PAUSE

PLAY/x1.3

Page 01/01

;

RETURN

PROG/CHECK

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture and press
[ENTER].

R

TIONS
FU N C

DIRECT NAVIGATO

S SUB MENU

∫ To register individual still pictures

GUIDE

3,4,2,1
ENTER
SUB MENU

Create copy list.

Start Copying
ENTER

ENTER

SUB MENU

FUNCTIONS

RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER

≥To select a multiple number of items together, press
[;] to add the check mark and press [ENTER] (➡ 57,
Multiple editing).
≥To show other pages (➡ 57)
≥To select the still pictures in another folder (➡ 57)
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 57)

RETURN

S
MANUAL SKIP

[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
REC REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
AUDIO STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
(➡ 7).
≥You cannot copy pictures recorded to DVD-R or CD-R/CD-RW.
[SD]
While stopped put the card in the slot, and the menu (➡ below) is
automatically displayed.
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures (JPEG)”, press [ENTER] and
then go to step 4 on page 57, “Copying all the still pictures on a
card—Copy All Pictures”.

You can register a multiple number of still pictures on
the copying list by repeating steps 2–3.
4 Press [2] to confirm.

∫ To register on a folder by folder basis

SD Card

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture/Folder” and press [ENTER].

Album View
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Video (MPEG2)

Copy
SELECT
ENTER

Cancel All
RETURN

1 Copy Direction

SD CARD > HDD

Press [RETURN] to exit the screen.

Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Picture
Picture/Folder
No.

Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)

2 Copy Mode

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [ENTER].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [ENTER].

Copying using the copying list

1
2
3

While stopped

≥To select a multiple number of items together, press
[;] to add the check mark and press [ENTER] (➡ 57,
Multiple editing).
≥To show other pages (➡ 57)
≥To switch to another higher folder (➡ 57)
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 57)

Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
Copy” and press [ENTER].

You can register a multiple number of folders on the
copying list by repeating steps 4–5.

Copy

6 Press [2] to confirm.

Cancel All

1 Copy Direction

Source

SD CARD

Destination

HDD

SD CARD > HDD

2 Copy Mode
PICTURE High Speed

3 Create List

7

0

≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]
several times (➡ step 7).

4

5

RQT8415

56

≥For individual still pictures only
When specifying another folder as the copying destination,
select “Folder”.

Set the copy direction.
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (➡ step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press
[1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press
[ENTER].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [ENTER].
The same drive as the copy source can be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.

Set the recording mode.
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]
(➡ step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “PICTURE” and press [ENTER].
“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.
4 Press [2] to confirm.

Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [ENTER].

Folder

New folder

Make a new folder and dub ?

8

001
002
003
---

100__DVD
101__DVD
102__DVD
New folder

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER] to start copying.

To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].

Page 57 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
Press [ENTER] to register to the list.
≥A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

Copying all the still pictures on a card—
Copy All Pictures
[SD] > [HDD] or [RAM]
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the SD drive.

1

∫ To edit the copying list
Select the item in step 6–3 (for a still picture) or 6–5
(for a folder) (➡ 56, right column)
1 Press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
[ENTER].

Delete All

2

Add
Delete

Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or folder to be added
and press [ENTER].
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
You can also delete multiple items (➡ above, Multiple editing).
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 56)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [ENTER].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
–When a title or still picture has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
remove the card, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.

3

While stopped

Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy All
Pictures” and press [ENTER].

Copying still pictures

EH55.book

Copy All Pictures
Copy from

Copy to

4
5

SD CARD

HDD

Press [3, 4] to select “Copy to” and
press [2, 1] to select the drive.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Copy”
and press [ENTER].

To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].

∫ To select another folder
(➡ 7, Structure of folders displayed by this unit)
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [ENTER].
If you want to switch to another higher folder (➡ below).
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [ENTER].
Create List

Create List

Picture (JPEG)

SD CARD
Folder

Folder

SD CARD
103__DVD

0001

0002

0003

0004

----

----

----

----

----

----

----

----

001
002
003
004
---------

\DCIM\100__DVD
100__DVD
101__DVD
102__DVD
103__DVD

Page 01/01
Previous

Page 001/001

Picture 0012

Next
ENTER

ENTER
RETURN

File 0012

S SUB MENU

RETURN

You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
115:
[1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the
same list.
To switch to another higher folder
≥Only when selecting the source folder
If there is a multiple number of higher
folders recognizable, while the screen on
the right appears
1 Press [SUB MENU] and press [ENTER].
2 Press [2, 1] to select the higher
folder and press [ENTER].
You cannot register a folder with a
different higher folder to the same
list.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the desired
folder and press [ENTER].

001
002
003
004

\DCIM\100__DVD
100__DVD
101__DVD
102__DVD
103__DVD

Select Folder
Select folder to access.
\DCIM

Press ENTER to set.
SELECT
ENTER

RETURN

[Note]
≥When copying the still pictures on a folder by folder basis
(➡ 56) or card by card basis (➡ above, Copy All Pictures), files
other than the still picture files inside the folder will also be
copied. (This does not apply to the lower folders contained
inside the folders.)
≥If still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination
folder, the new still pictures are recorded following the existing
still pictures.
≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of
files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (➡ 37), copying
will stop partway through.
≥When a name has not been input for the copy source folder, it is
possible that this folder’s name will not be the same on the copy
destination. It is recommended that you input a folder name
before copying (➡ 49, Enter Album Name).
≥You cannot copy the information about the print number setting
(DPOF) or the picture rotation.
≥The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the
copy list may not be the same at the copy destination.

RQT8415

57

EH55.book

Page 58 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Copying from a video cassette recorder
TV

3

VOLUME

CH

DRIVE
SELECT

DRIVE SELECT

AV

When you want to start recording

Press [¥ REC].

PAGE

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP

∫

Recording starts.

CH

ShowView
DELETE

INPUT SELECT

SLOW/SEARCH

PAUSE

STOP

Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated
to prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so
treated cannot be recorded using this unit.

;

PLAY/x1.3

To skip unwanted parts
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
To stop recording
Press [∫].

PROG/CHECK

3,4,2,1
ENTER

ENTER

SUB MENU

TIONS
FU N C

DIRECT NAVIGATO

R

GUIDE

FUNCTIONS

≥Using Flexible Recording (➡ 27), you can record the content of a
video cassette (approx. 1–8 hours) to a 4.7 GB disc with the best
possible quality of recording without wasting disc space.

RETURN

DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec)

S
CREATE
CHAPTER

REC MODE
¥ REC

MANUAL SKIP

REC

REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC

AUDIO
O

S
STATUS
S DISPLAY
S
TIME SLIP
S

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
e.g., Connecting to the AV3 or DV input terminals on the front
You can also connect to the AV4 input terminals on the rear.
≥Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.
OPEN/CLOSE

EXT LINK

DV IN

REC

DRIVE
SELECT

k1.3
1.3

CH

S VIDEO IN VIDEO IN L/MONO -AUDIO IN- R
AV3

This unit

[HDD] [RAM] When the “DV Auto Rec” function is used, programmes
are recorded as a title while at the same time chapters are created at
each break in the images and the play list is created automatically.
Preparation
1 Turn off the main unit and DV equipment, then connect the
equipment with the unit’s DV input terminal (➡ left column).
2 Turn on the main unit and DV equipment.
3 Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.
4 Pause play of the DV equipment at the point you want recording
to start.
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 70).
After preparation is completed, the following screen appears.

DV IN

S VIDEO IN

DV Auto Rec

VIDEO IN L/MONO - AUDIO IN - R

DV unit is connected.
Record from the DV unit?

Yellow White Red
DV cable
(IEEE 1394, 4-pin)

Rec to HDD

S Video
cable§

Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.
If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural
Connect to L/MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front.
§ The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO terminal.
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal
Select the type of audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” in
the Setup menu (➡ 67).
When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder),
you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape only.

RETURN

≥When the screen is not displayed, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select
HDD or DVD and then continue from step 1.

1
2
3
4

If it becomes time for a timer recording to start while copying, the
recording will start and the copying will stop.

Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.
≥When recording bilingual programmes (➡ 8, Important notes for
recording)
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 70).
This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC
signals. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded
onto the HDD.)
≥To reduce noise in input from a video cassette recorder, set “AV-in
NR” to “On” in the on-screen menu (➡ 43).
≥Check the time on the unit is correct.

1

While stopped

Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.
RQT8415

58

e.g., If you have connected to AV3 input terminals, select
“AV3”.

2

Start play on the other equipment.

You can proceed to step 4.

ENTER

[Note]

Manual recording

Cancel

SELECT

Audio/Video
cable

Other video equipment

Rec to DVD

Press [2, 1] to select “Rec to
HDD” or “Rec to DVD” and press
[ENTER].

While stopped

Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “DV Auto Rec”
and press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Rec” and
press [ENTER].
Recording starts.

When recording finishes
The confirmation screen appears. Press [ENTER] to finish DV
automatic recording.
To stop recording
Press [∫].

[Note]
≥Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder) can
be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.
≥It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV equipment.
≥The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It
cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)
≥The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.
≥Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be
input properly.
≥The date and time information on the tape of the DV equipment will
not be recorded.
≥You cannot record and play simultaneously.
If the DV automatic recording function does not work properly,
check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the
unit off and back on.
If that does not work, follow the instructions for manual
recording (➡ left column).

EH55.book

Page 59 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Linked operations with the TV (Q Link)

Preparation
≥Connect this unit to your TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable (➡ 14).

Download from the TV

When you connect the unit to a TV, the station list data is automatically copied from the TV to the
unit, and the TV stations are assigned to the programme positions on the unit in the same order as
on the TV (➡ 18).

TV/DVD Auto On

When you press the following buttons, linked operations with the TV activate and corresponding
screens appear.
When this unit is on:

Press [FUNCTIONS]
[1] (PLAY)
[DIRECT NAVIGATOR]
[GUIDE]
[ShowView]
[PROG/CHECK]
When this unit is off (standby mode):

Press [1] (PLAY)
[DIRECT NAVIGATOR]
[GUIDE]
[ShowView]
[PROG/CHECK]
≥[DVD-V] [DVD-A] [CD] and MP3
The TV is automatically turned on and corresponding screen appear when you insert the discs.

DVD Auto Standby

When you turn the TV off, the unit is turned off as well. However, this function works in the stop
mode.
This function does not work during the following operations: Preset Download, Auto-Setup, Auto
Clock Setting, Child Lock and Manual Tuning.

Direct TV Recording

You can at once record the same programme that you are watching on the TV.
≥This function allows you to immediately start recording the programme that you are viewing on the
TV without having to change the channels on this unit.

Copying from a video cassette recorder/Linked operations with the TV (Q Link)

What is Q Link?
Q Link enables you to connect this unit to a Q Link equipped Panasonic TV and perform various linked functions.
The following systems from other manufacturers have similar function to Q Link from Panasonic.
For details, refer to your television’s operating instructions or consult your dealer.
≥Q Link (registered trademark of Panasonic)
≥Megalogic (registered trademark of Grundig)
≥DATA LOGIC (registered trademark of Metz)
≥SMARTLINK (registered trademark of Sony)
≥Easy Link (registered trademark of Philips)

1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
2

The selected drive lights up on the unit’s display.
If you selected the DVD drive

Insert a disc. (➡ 24)
3 Press and hold [¥ DIRECT TV REC] for 1 second.
Recording starts.
To stop recording
Press [∫].

RQT8415

59

EH55.book

Page 60 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

HDD, disc and card management
Setting the protection
DVD
Í
VOLUME

CH

DRIVE
SELECT

DRIVE SELECT

[RAM]

TV

Í

Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

AV
PAGE

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)

CH

4

ShowView
DELETE

SLOW/SEARCH

5
PAUSE

STOP

PLAY/x1.3

Press [3, 4] to select “Disc
Protection” and press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].

PROG/CHECK

DVD
Management

GUIDE

3,4,2,1
ENTER

ENTER

TIONS
FU N C

DIRECT NAVIGATO

R

DVD-RAM

FUNCTIONS

Titles
Used

11
0 : 22

Remain 5:38 (EP)

Disc Name
Disc Protection

SUB MENU

RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER

SELECT

RETURN

S

ENTER

MANUAL SKIP

REC

REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC

AUDIO

STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP

On

Delete all titles

RETURN

Format Disc

The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is writeprotected.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] [SD]
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
(➡ 7).

Common procedures
While stopped

2

Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].

For a DVD-RAM with a cartridge
≥With the write-protect tab in the protect position,
play automatically starts when inserted in the
unit.

PROTECT

[SD]
Switch the write-protect switch to the “LOCK” position.
LOCK

1

Cartridge-protection

FUNCTIONS
Remain 30:00 SP

HDD
Playback

ShowView Record

Recording

Advanced Copy

Delete

Playlists
Flexible Rec

Copy

Providing a name for a disc
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

DV Auto Rec

To Others
ENTER
RETURN

3

Setup
HDD Management

Press [3, 4] to select “HDD
Management”, “DVD Management” or
“Card Management” and press
[ENTER].
e.g., [RAM]
DVD
Management
DVD-RAM

Titles
Used

11
0 : 22

Remain 5:38 (EP)

Disc Name
Disc Protection

Off

Delete all titles

SELECT

ENTER
RETURN

Format Disc

≥When HDD has been selected, “Delete all titles” and
“Format HDD” are displayed.
≥When SD has been selected, “Format Card” only is
displayed.

You can provide a name for each disc.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ above).
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)

4

Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”
and press [ENTER].

➡ 63, Entering text
≥The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalized disc, the name is
displayed on the Top Menu.
≥[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other
equipment.
DVD
Management
DVD-RAM

My favorite

Documentary

Titles
Used

11
0 : 22

Remain 5:38 (

To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.

RQT8415

60

01/02

01
Chapter 1

02
Chapter 2

03

04

Page 61 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete
all titles
[HDD] [RAM]

Deleting all the contents of a disc or
card—Format

Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥Release protection (➡ 60).

[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] [SD]
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥Release protection (➡ 60).

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)

[Note]

4
5
6

Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all
titles” and press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [ENTER].

Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),
and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before
proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc or
card even if you have set protection.

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)

4

Press [3, 4] to select “Format HDD”,
“Format Disc” or “Format Card” and
press [ENTER].

5

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [ENTER].

A message appears when finished.

7

Press [ENTER].

To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.

6

[Note]

HDD, disc and card management

EH55.book

A message appears when formatting is finished.

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Deleting all video titles will result in all playlists also being deleted.
≥Still picture data (JPEG, TIFF) or computer data cannot be deleted.
≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.

[Note]
≥Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may
take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.
This can render the disc or the card unusable.

7

Press [ENTER].

[Note]
≥When a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it may not
be possible to use it on any other equipment.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed on the disc.
≥You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.

To stop formatting [RAM]
Press [RETURN].
≥You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc
must be reformatted if you do this.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.

RQT8415

61

EH55.book

Page 62 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

HDD, disc and card management
Refer to the control reference on page 60.

Selecting the background style–Top Menu
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVDVideo top menu after finalizing.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)

4
5

Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”
and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
background and press [ENTER].
Top Menu List

1

2

Display after finalizing
Thumbnail
(Still picture)
Title Name
4

5

3

[Note]
When finalizing a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take
longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately four
times).
After finalizing
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and you
can no longer record or edit.
≥[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting
(➡ 61) although it becomes play-only after finalizing.
≥When copying in high speed, chapters will be replicated.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] Titles are divided into about 5-minute ([+R] 8minute)§ chapters, if
–the titles were directly recorded to the disc.
–the titles were copied using any mode other than the high
speed mode (excluding [-R]DL] [+R]DL]).
§ This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode
of recording.
≥There is a pause of several seconds between titles and
chapters during play.

6

01

7

8

≥You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (➡ 45,
Change Thumbnail)

Selecting whether to show the Top
Menu first–Auto-Play Select
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select whether to show the top menu after finalizing.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)

4
5

Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play
Select” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or
“Title 1” and press [ENTER].
Top Menu: The top menu appears first.
Title 1:
The disc content is played without displaying the
top menu.

Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment–Finalize
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ above)
before finalizing the disc.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)

4
5
6

Press [3, 4] to select “Finalize” and
press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [ENTER].
A message appears when finalizing is finished.

[Note]
≥You cannot cancel finalizing.
≥Finalizing takes up to 15 minutes.
([-R]DL] [+R]DL] Finalizing takes up to 60 minutes.)
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalizing.
This will render the disc unusable.

7
RQT8415

62

Before
finalizing

After
finalizing

Recording/Editing/Entering name

Y

t

Play on other players

t

Y

9

Press [ENTER].

To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.

≥You cannot finalize discs recorded on other manufacturer’s
equipment.
≥If you finalize discs recorded on Panasonic equipment other than
this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu” may not be
displayed.
≥Discs finalized on this unit may not be playable on other players
due to the condition of the recording.
Visit Panasonic’s homepage for more information about DVDs.
http://www.panasonic-europe.com

Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu
[+RW]
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW
disc on other equipment.
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ left
column) before creating top menu.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)

4
5
6

Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top
Menu” and press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [ENTER].
Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.

7

Press [ENTER].

[Note]
≥You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the
created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such
cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.
≥You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.

EH55.book

Page 63 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Entering text
TV

VOLUME

CH

DRIVE
SELECT

AV

Numbered
buttons

¢

SKIP

CH

ShowView

Repeat this step to enter other characters.

DELETE

≥To delete a character
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field
and press [;]. (The selected characters are deleted.)

SLOW/SEARCH

:, 9
∫

PAUSE

STOP

≥Using the numbered buttons to enter characters

;

PLAY/x1.3

e.g., entering the letter “R”
1 Press [7] to move to the 7th row.
2 Press [7] twice to highlight
“R”.
3 Press [ENTER].

PROG/CHECK

ENTER

SUB MENU

SUB MENU

TIONS
FU N C

DIRECT NAVIGATO

R

GUIDE

3,4,2,1
ENTER
“Red”

RETURN

REC

MANUAL SKIP

“Green”

REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC

3

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]
AUDIO

STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP

You can give names to recorded titles, etc.

5 J

K
7

7

6 M N
7 P
8 T

L
7

O

Q

R

U

V

Press [∫] (Set).
“Writing...” appears then the screen returns to the Title view
screen and so on.

The maximum number of characters:
[HDD] [RAM]

Characters
64 (44§)

Title
Playlist

§

≥To enter a space
Press [¢] and press [ENTER].
≥Add/recall names (➡ below)

RETURN

S
CREATE
CHAPTER

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a
character and press [ENTER].

64

Album of still pictures

36

Disc ([RAM])

64

Title name for timer recording
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

Characters

Title

44

Disc

40

[SD]

Characters

Album of still pictures

36

To end partway
Press [RETURN].
Text is not added.

∫ To add a name
You can add frequently used names and recall them later.
Maximum number of added names: 20
Maximum number of characters per name: 20
After entering the name (steps 1–2).
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Add to List” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [9] to select “Add to List”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Add” and press [ENTER].
≥Press [RETURN] to cancel.

[Note]

∫ To recall an added name

If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “List Names” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:] to select “List Names”.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be recalled and
press [ENTER].

1

Show Enter Name screen.
Title (timer recording)
Select “Programme Name” in step 3 on page 30, right
column.
Title
Select “Enter Name” in step 5 on page 44.
Playlist
Select “Enter Name” in step 5 on page 47.
Disc
Select “Disc Name” in step 4 of “Providing a name for a
disc” on page 60.
Album of still pictures
Select “Enter Album Name” in step 4 on page 48, “To edit
the album”.

Name field: shows the text you have entered
Press the “Red” button or
Standard Characters
Other Characters
Enter Name
“Green” button to select
_
character type and press
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Top Menu Preview
2 A B C
a b c i j
[ENTER].
*
3 D E F
d e f / l %
“Standard Characters”:
4 G H I
g h i fl $ &
5 J K L
j k l O N @
; Delete
(➡ left, Alphabet characters,
m n o [
] _
6 M N O
Add to List
etc.)
7 P Q R S p q r s ( )
List Names
t u v { } 8 T U V
“Other Characters”:
x
y
z
|
W
X
Y
Z
w
9
\
π Set
(➡ below, Umlaut characters,
0 . , ? ! " ' : ; ` ^
Space
accented characters, etc.)

HDD, disc and card management/Entering text

2

PAGE

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
0 SELECT

∫ To delete an added name
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “List Names” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:] to select “List Names”.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be deleted.
3 Press [SUB MENU] to show “Delete Name” and press
[ENTER].
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
5 Press [RETURN].

For your reference
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu
after finalization (➡ 62). When entering a title name, the name that
will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu Preview”
window.
Enter Name
_
Chapter
1_

Standard Characters

Other Characters

Top Menu Preview

1 1

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

0

Chapter 1

2 A

B

C

a

b

c

i j

3 D

E

F

d

e

f

/

*

l %

4 G

H

I

g

h

i

fl

$

4

&

SELECT

ENTER

RETURN

¡

¢

£

¤

¥

¦

§

¨

©

ª

2 «

¬

-

®

¯

˚

±

²

³

´

3 µ

¶

·

¸

¹

º

»

¼ ½ ¾

4 ¿

À

Á

Â

Ã

Ä

Å Æ Ç

È

5 É

Ê

Ë

Ï

Ð

Ñ

Ò

Õ

Ì Í
Ö ×

Î

6 Ó Ô

Ø

Ù

Ú

Û

Ü

æ

1

7 Ý
8 ç

Þ

à

á

ä

å

è

é

ê

ë

ì

í

î

ï

ð

9 ñ
0 û

ò

ó

ß

ô

õ

ö

â

÷

ø

ù

ú

ü

ý

þ

ÿ
Space

ã

RQT8415

63

EH55.book

Page 64 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

FUNCTIONS window
By using the FUNCTIONS window you may access the main
functions quickly and easily.

1

DVD
TV

Í

Í

DRIVE
SELECT

AV

Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of
disc.

PAGE

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP

While stopped

Press [FUNCTIONS].

VOLUME

CH

CH

FUNCTIONS
Remain 30:00 SP

HDD

ShowView

Playback
Recording

DELETE
Delete
Copy

SLOW/SEARCH

To Others
ENTER
RETURN

PAUSE

STOP

PLAY/x1.3

PROG/CHECK

2
FUNCTIONS

Press [3, 4] to select an item and
press [ENTER].

RETURN

≥If you select “To Others” and press [ENTER], the following
screen appears. Press [3, 4] to select an item and press
[ENTER].

TIONS
FU N C

3,4,2,1
ENTER

DIRECT NAVIGATO

R

GUIDE

ENTER

SUB MENU

RETURN

S
CREATE
CHAPTER

MANUAL SKIP
FUNCTIONS
Remain 30:00 SP

HDD

REC

REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
Playback

AUDIO

Recording

STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP

Timer Recording
ShowView Record
Advanced Copy

Delete

Playlists
Flexible Rec

Copy
To Others
ENTER
RETURN

“Timer Recording”
appears in countries
where the GUIDE Plus+
system is available.

DV Auto Rec
Setup
HDD Management

≥If you press [RETURN], you can return to the previous
screen.
To exit the FUNCTIONS window
Press [FUNCTIONS].

TV
VOLUME

CH

DRIVE
SELECT

AV

Child Lock

PAGE

CH

5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP

STOP

The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.

ShowView
DELETE

Press and hold [ENTER]
and [RETURN]
simultaneously until “X
HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.

SLOW/SEARCH

PAUSE

PLAY/x1.3

PROG/CHECK

ENTER

SUB MENU

TIONS
FU N C

ENTER

DIRECT NAVIGATO

R

GUIDE

RETURN

RETURN

S
CREATE
CHAPTER

RQT8415

64

If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD” appears
on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.

MANUAL SKIP

REC

REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC

AUDIO

STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP

To cancel the Child Lock
Press and hold [ENTER] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X
HOLD” disappears.

Page 65 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Changing the unit’s settings
Common procedures

OPEN/CLOSE

EXT LINK

DV IN

1
REC

DRIVE
SELECT

k1.3
1.3

CH

S VIDEO IN VIDEO IN L/MONO -AUDIO IN- R
AV3

∫

2

< OPEN/CLOSE

3
4
DVD
TV

Í

Í
CH

DRIVE
SELECT

Numbered
buttons

SKIP

VOLUME

Tabs

PAGE

Setup

CH

Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others

ShowView
DELETE

SLOW/SEARCH

PAUSE

5

PLAY/x1.3

PROG/CHECK

R

GUIDE

ENTER

SUB MENU

TIONS
FU N C

3,4,2,1
ENTER

Menus

Options

FUNCTIONS

6

Remote Control
Clock
Power Save
Quick Start

DVD 1
Off
On

DivX Registration
Initialize

SELECT

TAB

ENTER

RETURN

Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select the option and
press [ENTER].

RETURN

RETURN

S

“Red”
“Green”

Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select the tab and
press [1].

AV

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
0 SELECT
STOP

While stopped

CREATE
CHAPTER

MANUAL SKIP

REC

REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC

AUDIO

STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP

“Yellow”

To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].

FUNCTIONS window/Child Lock/Changing the unit’s settings

X CH W

DIRECT NAVIGATO

EH55.book

To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.

[Note]
There may be differences in operation methods. If this happens,
follow the on-screen instructions for the operation.

(continued on the next page)

RQT8415

65

EH55.book

Page 66 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Changing the unit’s settings

(continued)

Refer to the control reference on page 65.

Summary of settings
The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.

Tabs
Tuning

Menus

Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)

Manual (➡ 69)
Auto-Setup Restart (➡ 70)
Download from TV (➡ 70)

Disc

Settings for playback
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Ratings
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit password
with the numbered buttons when the password screen is
shown.
≥Do not forget your password.

≥8 No Limit: All DVD-Video can be played.
≥1 to 7:
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding
ratings recorded on them.
≥0 Lock All: Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
≥Unlock Recorder
≥Change Level

≥Change Password
≥Temporary Unlock

DVD-Audio Video mode Playback
Select “On” to play DVD-Video content on some DVD-Audio.

≥On: The setting returns to “Off” when you change the disc or
turn the unit off.
≥Off

Soundtrack

≥German
≥French
≥Italian
≥English
≥Spanish
≥Dutch
≥Original: The original language of each disc will be selected.
≥Other ¢¢¢¢

Subtitle

Menus

Choose the language for audio, subtitle and
disc menus. [DVD-V]
≥Some discs start in a certain language despite
any changes you make here.
≥In case of English/French/German/Italian/
Spanish/Dutch languages, when you make
download from TV, and Country setting of
Auto-Setup in plug-in, the language
(“Soundtrack”/“Menus”) will be same and
“Subtitle” will set to “Automatic”.
≥Enter a code (➡ 71) with the numbered
buttons when you select “Other ¢¢¢¢”.
When the selected language is not available
on the disc, the default language is played.
There are discs where you can only switch the
language from the menu screen (➡ 35).

≥Automatic: If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not
available, subtitles of that language will automatically
appear if available on that disc.
≥English
≥German
≥French
≥Italian
≥Spanish
≥Dutch
≥Other ¢¢¢¢
≥German
≥English
≥Spanish
≥Dutch
≥Other ¢¢¢¢

≥French

≥Italian

Settings for Recording
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Recording time in EP mode
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP
mode (➡ 25, Recording modes and approximate recording
times).

≥EP (6 Hours):You can record for 6 hours on an unused 4.7 GB
disc.
≥EP (8 Hours):You can record for 8 hours on an unused 4.7 GB
disc.
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6 Hours)” than when
using “EP (8 Hours)”.

Rec for High Speed Copy
≥On: Makes high speed mode copying to DVD-R, etc. possible.
When high speed copying a title to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVDPress [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW, it is necessary
–Pictures are saved in 4:3.
to turn this setting “On” before recording to the HDD; however,
–Select the type of audio in advance from “Bilingual Audio
the screen size, etc. is restricted (➡ right). We recommend
Selection” (➡ 67).
turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to DVD-R, etc. is ≥Off
not necessary when recording a programme.
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
≥Maximum
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high≥Normal (Silent):
speed copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW Selecting “Normal (Silent)” means the noise generated by this
4X discs).
unit is less than “Maximum”, however the time required for
copying will double (approximately).

Picture

RQT8415

66

Comb Filter
Select the picture sharpness when recording.
The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC”
(➡ 70).

≥On: Pictures become clear and vivid. Normally, use this setting.
≥Off: Select it when recording noisy pictures.

Still Mode
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play
(➡ 81, Frames and fields).

≥Automatic
≥Field: Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is selected.
(The picture is coarser.)
≥Frame: Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be seen
clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The picture is
clearer and finer.)

Seamless Play
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and
partially deleted titles.

≥On: The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does
not work when there are several audio types included on
the playlist and when using Quick View. Additionally, the
positioning of chapter segments may change slightly.
≥Off: The points where chapters in playlists change are played
accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.

Page 67 Thursday, January 19, 2006

Tabs
Sound

1:58 PM

Menus

Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)

Dynamic Range Compression [DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)
Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.

≥On
≥Off

Bilingual Audio Selection
Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type
when:
–Recording or copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVDVideo format), +R, +R DL and +RW.
–“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (➡ 26).
–Recording or copying sound in LPCM (➡ below, “Audio Mode
for XP Recording”).

≥M 1
≥M 2
You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an
external source, such as when copying from a video cassette
recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV
input terminal). Select on the other equipment.
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of
audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (➡ below).

Digital Audio Output
Change the settings when you have connected equipment through this unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (➡ 17).
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
PCM Down Conversion
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96
kHz or 88.2 kHz.
≥Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz despite the
settings across if the signals have a sampling frequency
of over 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz, or the disc has copy
protection.

≥On: Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz. (Choose
when the connected equipment cannot process signals
with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)
≥Off: Signals are output as 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz. (Choose when
the connected equipment can process signals with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)

Dolby Digital Select how to output the signal.
Select “Bitstream” if the connected
equipment decodes the signal.
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal
and outputs it as 2 channels.
DTS

≥Bitstream:When connecting to equipment displaying the Dolby
Digital logo.
≥PCM: When connecting to equipment not displaying the Dolby
Digital logo.

[Note]

MPEG

Display

Not making the proper settings may result
in noise or some trouble for digital
recording.

Changing the unit’s settings

EH55.book

≥Bitstream: When connecting to equipment displaying the DTS
logo.
≥PCM: When connecting to equipment not displaying the DTS
logo.
≥Bitstream: When connected to equipment with a built-in
MPEG decoder.
≥PCM: When connected to equipment without a built-in MPEG
decoder.

Audio Mode for XP Recording
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP
mode.

≥Dolby Digital (➡ 81)
≥LPCM (➡ 81)
–The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than
that of normal XP mode recordings.
–The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you
selected LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.
–When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of
audio in advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ above).

Audio Mode for DV Input
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s
DV input terminal (➡ 58).

≥Stereo 1: Records audio (L1, R1).
≥Stereo 2: Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)
subsequent to original recording.
≥Mix:
Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ above).

Language
Choose the language for these menus and on-screen
messages.

≥English
≥Español

On-Screen Messages
Choose whether to show status messages automatically.

≥Automatic
≥Off

Grey Background
Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the grey
background when tuner reception is weak.

≥On
≥Off

FL Display
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save”
(➡ 68) to “On”.

≥Bright
≥Dim
≥Automatic: The display turns dark during play and disappears
when the unit is turned off. It reappears
momentarily if a button is pressed. While using this
mode, the standby power consumption can be
reduced.

≥Deutsch
≥Nederlands

≥Français

≥Italiano

RQT8415

67

EH55.book

Page 68 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Changing the unit’s settings
Refer to the control reference on page 65.
Tabs
Menus
Connection TV Aspect (➡ 18)

Set to match the type of television
connected.
Progressive (➡ 22)
This setting is fixed with
“Off” if you set “AV1 Output”
to “RGB 1 (without
component)” or “RGB 2
(without component)”.
TV System (➡ 70)
AV1 Output
Selects the output from the AV1 terminal.
Select “RGB 1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without
component)” for RGB output.
Select “Video (with component)” or “S Video (with component)”
for component output (progressive output).
Set according to the signal and terminal of the connected TV.
When a decoder is connected, do not set to “RGB 1 (without
component)”.

AV2 Settings
Set to match the connected equipment.
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
AV2 Input
Set to “RGB/Video” or “RGB” when receiving or recording
RGB output from external equipment.
AV2 Connection
This setting is fixed with “Ext” if you set “TV System” to
“NTSC” (➡ 70).
Ext Link
This setting cannot be made when the “TV System” is set to
“NTSC” (➡ 70).

Others

Remote Control (➡ 23)
Clock (➡ 71)
Power Save
≥Refer to the following when “Power Save” is set to “On”.
–“FL Display” is automatically set to “Automatic” (➡ 67).
–The “Quick Start” function does not work. (It is automatically
turned to “Off”.)
–When the unit is off, Pay TV programmes cannot be watched
on the TV because the signal from the connected decoder is
not looped through. To watch them, turn on the unit.
≥If “Quick Start” is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically
turned to “Off”.
Quick Start
The Quick Start feature enables this unit to be ready to start
recording as quick as approx. 1 second§ after turning it on. You
can start recording soon after deciding you want to record
something.
§Only when recording to the HDD or DVD-RAM.
≥If this is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically turned to “Off”.
≥Startup takes up to a minute when:
–You play a disc or start recording to discs other than DVDRAM.
–You want to make other operations.
–The clock has not been set.
DivX Registration
Initialize
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Shipping Condition
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password
and time settings return to the factory preset. The timer
recording programmes are also cancelled.
Default Settings
All the settings other than the programmed channels, time
settings, country settings, language settings, disc language
settings, ratings level, ratings password, remote control
code, return to the factory presets.

RQT8415

68

Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
≥16:9
≥On

≥4:3
≥Off

≥Letterbox

≥PAL
≥NTSC
≥Video (with component):
Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite signal.
≥S Video (with component):
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video signal.
≥RGB 1 (without component):
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB
signal. If you always would like to view the picture from the unit
in RGB signal, select this mode. The TV screen will
automatically switch to display the picture from the unit when
the unit is turned on.
≥RGB 2 (without component):
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB
signal. If you would like to switch to display the picture from the
unit only when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.

≥RGB/Video
≥RGB
≥Video
≥S Video
≥Decoder: When a decoder is connected to descramble the
scrambled signals (e.g., C+decoder).
When the VCR or a digital/satellite receiver is
≥Ext:
connected.
≥Ext Link 1: When a digital/satellite receiver which transmits a
special control signal recordings via the 21-pin
Scart cable is connected.
Start and stop timings of recording are controlled
by the control signal.
≥Ext Link 2: When external equipment with a timer function is
connected.
When it turns on, recording starts.
When it turns off, recording stops.
≥DVD 1

≥DVD 2

≥DVD 3

≥On: Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned
to standby (➡ 82).
≥Off

≥On
≥Off:

Standby power consumption is less than when this is
set to “On”.

≥You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX
Video-on-Demand (VOD) content (➡ 39).

≥Yes
≥No
≥Yes
≥No

Page 69 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Tuning

∫ To change the tuning settings for individual
programme position

1

While stopped

2

Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].

3

Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Tuning” and
press [1].

4

Setup

6

Press [3, 4, 2, 1]
to select a
programme position
and press [ENTER].

SELECT

Name

To enter or change the name of a TV station
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to enter station name and
press [ENTER].
If the station name needs a blank space, select
the blank between “Z” and “¢”.

Channel

To enter newly available TV stations or change
the channel number of an already tuned TV
station
Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons to enter
the channel number of the desired TV station.
Wait a few moments until the desired TV station
has been tuned.
After the desired TV station is tuned, press
[ENTER].

Fine Tuning

To obtain the best tuning condition
Press [3, 4] to adjust the best tuning condition
and press [ENTER].
≥Press [1] to return to “Auto”.

Video
System

To select the video system type
Press [3, 4] to select “PAL” or “SECAM” if the
picture lacks colour, and press [ENTER].
Auto:
This unit automatically distinguishes
PAL and SECAM signals.
PAL:
For receiving PAL signals.
SECAM: For receiving SECAM signals.

Audio
Mode§1

To select the audio reception type
If sound quality is poor, press [3, 4] to select
“BG” or “L” and press [ENTER].
BG: PAL B.G.H/SECAM B.G
L: SECAM L, L’

Mono

To select the type of sound to be recorded
Press [3, 4] to select “On” if the stereo sound is
distorted due to inferior reception conditions, or if
you want to record the normal (mono) sound
during a stereo, bilingual or NICAM§2 broadcast,
and press [ENTER].

Title Page

To enter the Teletext title page for a channel
Entering title page number allows the unit to
automatically record programme and station
names.
Press [3, 4] or numbered buttons to enter the
number and press [ENTER].
≥To find the correct title page for the station, refer
to its Teletext TV guide.

Press [3, 4] to select “Manual” and
press [ENTER].
Manual Tuning

If you delete programme position
of Host channel, GUIDE Plus+ data
is also deleted. Continue?

Yes

No

If you select “Yes” and press [ENTER], the following screen
appears.
Manual Tuning
Pos Name

SELECT
ENTER
RETURN

Delete

Move

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

ARD
ZDF
N3
HR3
BR3

Ch
4
2
5
8
10

Pos Name

Ch

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Add

To delete a programme position
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the
“Red” button.
To add a blank programme position
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the
“Green” button.
To move a TV station to another programme position
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press
the “Yellow” button.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the new programme position to
which you want to assign the TV station and press [ENTER].

[Note]
≥When the unit connected to a Q Link compatible TV with a fully
wired 21-pin Scart cable sets itself automatically (➡ 18), only
deletion of the programme position can be performed.
≥If you delete programme position of Host Channel, the GUIDE
Plus+ data is also deleted.

RETURN

To change the programme position in which
the TV stations are assigned
Press [3, 4] or numbered buttons to select the
number of the desired programme position and
press [ENTER].

You can add or delete channels, or change programme positions.

5

Auto
BG
Off
301

Pos

RETURN

Manual

1
ARD
4
Auto

Press [3, 4] to select an item and press [1].

TAB

ENTER

SELECT

Pos
Name
Channel
Fine Tuning
Video System
Audio Mode
Mono
Title Page

RETURN : leave

Manual
Auto-Setup Restart
Download from TV

Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others

Manual
Tuning

Changing the unit’s settings

EH55.book

You can make the following two settings by selecting the external
input channel (AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4) in step 5.
≥Video System (Auto/PAL/SECAM)
In order to record properly, make the appropriate settings to match
the connected equipment.
≥Title Page (Auto/Off)
§1

It is not displayed in Germany. Audio reception type is fixed at
“BG”.
§2 Not provided for Germany.

RQT8415

69

EH55.book

Page 70 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Changing the unit’s settings

Refer to the control reference on page 65.

TV System

Restart set up
You can restart auto channel setting if set up (➡ 18) fails for some reason.
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ 69)

5

Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Setup
Restart” or “Download from TV” and
press [ENTER].
The confirmation screen appears.
Select “Download from TV” when you connect the unit to a Q
Link compatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable.
(Programme positions are downloaded from the TV and
copied through this convenient function.)

6

Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting with,
or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles on the
HDD.

1
2
3

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].

4

≥If the country setting menu appears on the television
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the country and press
[ENTER].

5

You can also use the following method to restart Auto-Setup.
When the unit is on and stopped
Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the
country setting screen appears.
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and
time settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.

6

Disc
Picture
Sound
Display

Connection
Others

List of TV Reception Channels
TV Channel

5 – 10

70

§

Other
Countries

2–4
5 – 10, G – J
(172.00 to
220.00 MHz)
(INTER
BANDE)

7

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].

To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].

E11 – E12
(Germany)
H1 – H2 (Italy)

—

13 – 20

A – H (Only
Italy)

—

—

21 – 69

E21 – E69

E21 – E69

E21 – E69

74 – 78

S01 – S05

—

S1 – S5

80

S1

—

M1

S2 – S10

B–F
(100.00 to
172.00 MHz)
(INTER
BANDE)

M2 – M10

90 – 99

S11 – S20

K – Q (220.00
to 300.00 MHz)
(INTER
BANDE)

U1 – U10

121 – 141

S21 – S41§
(Hyperband)

S21 – S41
(299.25 to
467.25 MHz)
(INTER
BANDE)

S21 – S41
(Hyperband)

Only for 8 MHz channel raster

RETURN

E2 – E12

11 – 12

81 – 89

RQT8415

France

SELECT

ENTER

≥PAL (factory preset)
–Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system
television. Titles recorded using NTSC are played as PAL
60.
–Select to record television programmes and PAL input from
other equipment.
–[HDD] Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on the
HDD.
≥NTSC
–Select when connecting to a NTSC television. Television
programmes cannot be recorded properly.
–Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.
–[HDD] Select when playing a NTSC input title recorded on
the HDD.

≥If you do not want to setup the GUIDE Plus+ system
Press [2, 1] to select “No” and press [ENTER].
Television picture appears. Setup is complete.

E2 – E10

NTSC

Tuning

When the GUIDE Plus+ system setting message appears.
≥If you want to setup the GUIDE Plus+ system
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Go to step 2 on page 19.

2–4

TV System

PAL

To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.

Germany/Italy

Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Connection”
and press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select “TV System”
and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select the TV system
and press [ENTER].
Setup

To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].

Channel
indication

While stopped

To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.

∫ To change the setting all at once (PAL!#NTSC)
While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the
main unit for 5 or more seconds.

[Note]
≥This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC
signals. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded
onto the HDD.)
≥If “NTSC” has been selected, the GUIDE Plus+ system cannot be
used.

EH55.book

Page 71 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Manual Clock Setting
Usually, the unit’s setup function (➡ 18) automatically adjusts the clock to correct time. Under some reception conditions, however, the unit
cannot set the clock automatically.
In this case, follow the operation steps below to manually set the clock.

1

Changing the unit’s settings

≥In the case of a power failure, the clock setting remains in memory for approximately 60 minutes.
While stopped

Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others” and press [ENTER].

2
3
4
5
6

Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select “Clock” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Off” of “Automatic” and press [ENTER].
Clock
Automatic Off
Time
15 : 45 : 39

Date
1 .

8 . 2006

Number
0

9

CHANGE
SELECT

Please set clock manually.
ENTER: store RETURN: leave

ENTER
RETURN

7

Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change.
The items change as follows:
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J

8

Press [3, 4] to change the setting.
You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.

9

Press [ENTER] when you have finished the settings.
The clock starts.

To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.

[Note]
If a TV station transmits a time setting signal, and when “Automatic” in the Clock setting menu is set to “On”, the automatic time correction
function checks the time and if necessary it is adjusted several times every day.

Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.
Abkhazian:
6566
Afar:
6565
Afrikaans:
6570
Albanian:
8381
Ameharic:
6577
Arabic:
6582
Armenian:
7289
Assamese:
6583
Aymara:
6589
Azerbaijani:
6590
Bashkir:
6665
Basque:
6985
Bengali; Bangla:
6678
Bhutani:
6890
Bihari:
6672
Breton:
6682
Bulgarian:
6671
Burmese:
7789
Byelorussian: 6669
Cambodian:
7577

Catalan:
Chinese:
Corsican:
Croatian:
Czech:
Danish:
Dutch:
English:
Esperanto:
Estonian:
Faroese:
Fiji:
Finnish:
French:
Frisian:
Galician:
Georgian:
German:
Greek:
Greenlandic:
Guarani:

6765
9072
6779
7282
6783
6865
7876
6978
6979
6984
7079
7074
7073
7082
7089
7176
7565
6869
6976
7576
7178

Gujarati:
Hausa:
Hebrew:
Hindi:
Hungarian:
Icelandic:
Indonesian:
Interlingua:
Irish:
Italian:
Japanese:
Javanese:
Kannada:
Kashmiri:
Kazakh:
Kirghiz:
Korean:
Kurdish:
Laotian:
Latin:
Latvian, Lettish:

7185
7265
7387
7273
7285
7383
7378
7365
7165
7384
7465
7487
7578
7583
7575
7589
7579
7585
7679
7665
7686

Lingala:
Lithuanian:
Macedonian:
Malagasy:
Malay:
Malayalam:
Maltese:
Maori:
Marathi:
Moldavian:
Mongolian:
Nauru:
Nepali:
Norwegian:
Oriya:
Pashto, Pushto:
Persian:
Polish:
Portuguese:
Punjabi:
Quechua:

7678
7684
7775
7771
7783
7776
7784
7773
7782
7779
7778
7865
7869
7879
7982
8083
7065
8076
8084
8065
8185

Rhaeto-Romance:
8277
Romanian:
8279
Russian:
8285
Samoan:
8377
Sanskrit:
8365
Scots Gaelic: 7168
Serbian:
8382
Serbo-Croatian: 8372
Shona:
8378
Sindhi:
8368
Singhalese:
8373
Slovak:
8375
Slovenian:
8376
Somali:
8379
Spanish:
6983
Sundanese:
8385
Swahili:
8387
Swedish:
8386
Tagalog:
8476
Tajik:
8471

Tamil:
Tatar:
Telugu:
Thai:
Tibetan:
Tigrinya:
Tonga:
Turkish:
Turkmen:
Twi:
Ukrainian:
Urdu:
Uzbek:
Vietnamese:
Volapük:
Welsh:
Wolof:
Xhosa:
Yiddish:
Yoruba:
Zulu:

8465
8484
8469
8472
6679
8473
8479
8482
8475
8487
8575
8582
8590
8673
8679
6789
8779
8872
7473
8979
9085

RQT8415

71

EH55.book

Page 72 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Messages
On the television

Page

Authorization Error.

≥You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different
registration code. You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX)

Cannot finish recording completely.

≥The programme was copy-protected.
≥The HDD or disc may be full.
≥The maximum number of times you can record the program is exceeded.

—
—
24

Cannot playback.
TV system is different from the
setting.
To playback, please change the TV
System in Setup.

≥You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV
system currently selected on the unit.
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit.

70

Cannot record on the disc.

≥The disc may be dirty or scratched.

10

Cannot play on this unit.

≥You tried to play a non-compatible image.
≥Turn the unit off and re-insert the card.

37
13

Cannot record. Disc is full.

≥[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles.
[Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is
no increase in disc space. Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW
increases only when the last recorded title is deleted.]
≥Use a new disc.

38, 39

Unable to format.

Cannot record. Maximum number of
titles exceeded.

No Disc

≥The disc may be upside down.

No folders.

≥There is no compatible folder in this unit.

No SD CARD
No valid SD card.

≥The card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card already
inserted, turn off the unit, remove and then re-insert the card.
≥The card inserted is not compatible or the card format does not match.

Not enough space in the copy
destination.

45, 50,
61

—
—
7, 37
13
7

≥Create space by deleting any unnecessary items.

45, 49,
50, 61

≥Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination
Capacity” is not exceeded.

54, 57

≥The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or unfinalized DVDR, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R or +RW.
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW.
≥You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit. Record to the
HDD and then copy to the disc.

4–5

≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on the HDD
or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are
greater than 500.
Delete unwanted titles from the HDD.

50

Rental Expired.

≥The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it. (DivX)

39

$

≥The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.

—

This is a non-recordable disc.
This disc is not formatted properly.
Format it using DVD Management in
FUNCTIONS menu.
Not enough space on HDD. Space
of 4 hours (in SP mode) is
necessary.

61
—

Maximum number of titles is
recorded on HDD. Please delete
unnecessary titles.

RQT8415

72

EH55.book

Page 73 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

On the unit’s display
The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.
DVD 
(“∑” stands for a number.)

≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.

23

≥GUIDE Plus+ data is being downloaded.

20

HARD ERR

≥If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was
purchased.

—

NoERAS

≥You cannot delete items on this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.

—

NoREAD

≥The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit.
≥This message may appear when the DVD-RAM lens cleaner has finished cleaning.
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc.

10
10

NoWRIT

≥You cannot write to this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.

—

PLEASE WAIT§

≥There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying
out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken.
Wait until the message disappears.

—

PROG FULL§

≥There are already 32 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes.

31

SLEEP

≥In order to extend HDD life, the HDD is in SLEEP mode.

9

SP 35:50
LP 151h
“SP”,”LP” and the numbers
are examples.

≥Available space on the HDD or disc.
The example “ SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available and the example “LP
151h” is displayed when over 100 hours are available.
“SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and “151h” means “151
hours”.

—

UNFORMAT§

≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVD-RW (DVDVideo format) that has been recorded on other equipment.
Format the disc to use it.
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted.

61

UNSUPPORT§

≥You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on.

4–6

U59

≥The unit is hot.
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message
disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the
rear of the unit.

—

U61

≥(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording, playback or
copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not
broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.

—

U88

≥(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while
recording, playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to
normal operation; it is not broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.

76

U99

≥The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby. Now press
[Í/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.

—

Hor F

≥There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s
condition.)
≥Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the
following.
1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.
2. Press [Í/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)
If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the
dealer. Inform the dealer of the service number when requesting service.

—

GUIDE
§

X HOLD

≥The Child Lock function is activated.
Press and hold [ENTER] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X HOLD” disappears.

Messages

Press and hold [ENTER] and the indicated number button at the same time for
more than 2 seconds.

76–80

64

§

The message are alternately displayed.

RQT8415

73

EH55.book

Page 74 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Frequently asked questions
Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit operations.
Set up
What equipment is necessary to play
multi channel surround sound?

—

≥You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through the amplifier etc.

The television has a Scart terminal and
component video input terminal. Which
should I connect with?

≥If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube) we recommend using the Scart
terminal. You can enjoy high-quality RGB video from this unit by connecting to an RGB
compatible television.
If you have an LCD/plasma television or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan,
connect through the component video terminals for high-quality progressive video.
If you have a CRT television or a multi system television using PAL mode that is
compatible with progressive scan, we cannot recommend progressive output as some
flickering can occur.

14–16

Is my television progressive output
compatible?

≥All Panasonic televisions that have 625 (576)/50i · 50p, 525 (480)/60i · 60p input terminals
are compatible. Consult the manufacturer if you have another brand of television.

—

≥You cannot play DVD-Video if their region number does not include “2” or “ALL”.
Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information.

17

Cover

Can a DVD-Video that does not have a
region number be played?

≥The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a standard. You cannot play
discs that do not have a region number. You also cannot play discs that do not conform to
a standard.

Please tell me about disc compatibility
with this unit.

≥This unit records and plays DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +RW, and
plays DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format). However you cannot directly record to a
DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit (playback and copy are possible).
≥This unit also records and plays high speed recording compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW discs.

4–6

≥This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded in one of the following
standards: CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD (conforming to IEC62107), DivX, MP3 and still
pictures (JPEG/TIFF).
≥You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with this unit.

6, 37

Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW
compatibility with this unit.

Recording
Can I record from a commercially
purchased video cassette or DVD?

74

Page
17

Are the headphones and speakers
directly connected to the unit?

Disc
Can I play DVD-Video, DVD-Audio and
Video CDs bought in another country?

RQT8415

≥DVD-Video:
You can play DVD-Video multi channel surround by digitally connecting an amplifier
equipped with a Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG decoder.
≥DVD-Audio:
This unit plays DVD-Audio in 2 channels. You cannot play multi channel surround sound.

—

—

—

≥Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy protected; therefore, recording
is usually not possible.

—

Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD- ≥You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players after finalizing the disc on
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW
this unit. However, depending on the condition of the recording, the quality of the disc and
recorded on this unit be played on other
capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible.
equipment?
≥If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment.

—

—

Can I record digital audio signals using
this unit?

≥You cannot record digital signals. The digital audio terminals on this unit are for output
only. (The audio recorded using the unit’s DV input terminal from a digital video
camcorder, for example, is recorded digitally.)

—

Can a digital audio signal from this unit
be recorded to other equipment?

≥You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD, change the “Digital Audio
Output” settings to the following in the Setup menu.
–PCM Down Conversion: On
–Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG: PCM
However, only as long as digital recording from the disc is permitted and the recording
equipment is compatible with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz.
≥You cannot record MP3 signals.

67

Can I switch to bilingual broadcast
during recording?

≥With HDD and DVD-RAM, you can. Just press [AUDIO].
≥With DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +RW you cannot. Change before
recording with “Bilingual Audio Selection” in the Setup menu.

36
67

Can I high speed copy to a disc?

≥Yes, you can.
Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies.

51

—

Page 75 Thursday, January 19, 2006

GUIDE Plus+
Why is the GUIDE Plus+ system only
available after approx. 2 hours?

1:58 PM

≥The data rate, at which GUIDE Plus+ is sent, is limited. Depending on the country, signal
quality and number of channels received, the time until the GUIDE Plus+ system is ready
can vary.

—

The Host Channel in France is Canal
Plus. Do I have to sign a contract with
Canal Plus in order to be able to use the
GUIDE Plus+ system?

≥No, you can use the GUIDE Plus+ system without a contract.

—

How often is the GUIDE Plus+ data
updated and when?

≥The GUIDE Plus+ data is transmitted from the Host Channel (the television station
transmitting the television programme list) several times a day. Data will be transmitted at
2:50 AM every day.
It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download.
The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded automatically when the unit is turned off.

20

Is it possible to programme a recording,
with a start and end time that are
different from the GUIDE Plus+ system?

≥You can manually change the start and end time of programmes in the Timer Recording
menu.

30

Does the GUIDE Plus+ system support
VPS/PDC?

≥The GUIDE Plus+ system works independently of VPS/PDC. However, you can
programme TIMER recordings with VPS/PDC in the Timer Recording menu.

32

How can I cancel a TIMER
programming?

≥The “F” symbol appears in the GUIDE Plus+ when a Timer Recording is programmed
with the GUIDE Plus+ system. To cancel a Timer Recording programming, press [PROG/
CHECK]. Select the desired entry and press [¢].

31

Can I receive GUIDE Plus+ system data
via a connected satellite receiver or a
Set Top Box?

≥No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings with satellite receivers or Set
Top Boxes, please use the External Link feature or your unit’s manual timer programming.

30, 33

What happens when I unplug my unit
from the power outlet?

≥The GUIDE Plus+ system data will not be updated. If the unit is disconnected from the
power supply for a longer period of time, then the GUIDE Plus+ data is lost. Make sure
that the time is set again appropriately.

—

What happens if my postal code
changes, e.g. if I move?

≥Change the postal code in the GUIDE Plus+ Setup menu. If necessary, perform a full
Auto-Setup. Saved GUIDE Plus+ data may be lost.

21

Frequently asked questions

EH55.book

RQT8415

75

EH55.book

Page 76 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Troubleshooting guide
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart
do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.
The following do not indicate a problem with this unit:
≥Regular disc rotating sounds.
≥Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.
≥Image disturbance during search.
≥Interruptions in reception due to periodic satellite broadcasting
breaks.
≥A sound is heard when the HDD goes into SLEEP mode, or
operations are slow to respond in SLEEP mode.
Power
No power.
The unit does not turn on
pressing [Í DVD].
The unit switches to standby mode.
Displays
The display is dim.

≥Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a
Panasonic disc.)
≥The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being activated.
(Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds.)
≥When the HDD has been automatically placed in the SLEEP mode
(➡ 9), or the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected
sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.

≥Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active household mains socket.
≥Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s
display blinks when [Í DVD] is pressed). Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby.

Page
14, 15
33

≥One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to turn the unit on.

—

≥Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu.

67

“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s
display.

≥Set the clock.

71

The time recorded on the disc
and the available time shown do
not add up.
The play time shown for MP3
does not agree with the actual
time.

≥Times shown may disagree with actual times.
≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases only when the
last recorded title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.
≥Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL, there is no
increase in disc space.
≥More disc space than the actual recording time is used after recording or editing the DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200 times or more.
≥While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.

—
—

The clock is not correct.

≥Under adverse reception conditions, etc., the automatic time correction function may not
work. In this case, “Automatic” is automatically turned to “Off”. If re-setting the Auto Clock
Setting does not work, set the time manually.

71

Compared to the actual recorded
time, the elapsed time displayed
is less.
(Only when recording in NTSC)

≥The displayed recording/play time is converted from the number of frames at 29.97 frames
(equal to 0.999 seconds) to one second. There will be a slight difference between the time
displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour elapsed time may display as
approximately 59 minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.

—

“U88” is displayed and the disc
cannot be ejected.

≥The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following to eject the disc.
1 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about 10
seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
2 While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for
about 5 seconds. Remove the disc.

—

≥This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment.
It can be solved by using a signal booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not
solved by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.

—

TV screen and video
Television reception worsens
after connecting the unit.

—
—
—

Status messages do not appear.

≥Select “Automatic” in “On-Screen Messages” in the Setup menu.

67

The grey background does not
appear.

≥Select “On” in “Grey Background” in the Setup menu.

67

Picture does not appear during
timer recording.

≥Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off. To confirm the timer recording
is going to work properly, turn the unit on.

—

The 4:3 aspect ratio picture
expands left and right.

≥Use the television to change the aspect. If your television does not have that function, set
“Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”.
≥Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu.

43

The recorded title is stretched
vertically.

≥16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the following cases.
–If you recorded to the HDD or a DVD-RAM and “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to “On”
in the Setup menu.
–If you recorded or copied to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R,
+R DL or +RW.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating
instructions.

66

There is a lot of after-image
when playing video.

≥Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”.

43

When playing DVD-Video using
progressive output, one part of
the picture momentarily appears
to be doubled up.

≥Set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”. This problem is caused by the editing method
or material used on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlace output.

43

There is no apparent change in
picture quality when adjusted
with the Picture menu in the onscreen menus.

≥The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.

—

The images from this unit do not
appear on the television.

≥Make sure that the television is connected to the AV1 terminal, VIDEO OUT terminal,
S VIDEO OUT terminal or COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals on this unit.
≥Make sure that the television’s input setting (e.g., AV 1) is correct.
≥Progressive output is set to on but the connected television is not progressive compatible.
Press and hold [∫] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for more than 5
seconds to cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.
≥The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used by the disc now playing. While
stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds.
The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa.

68

Screen size is wrong.

Picture is distorted.

RQT8415

76

14–16
—
—
70

Page 77 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Sound
No sound.
Low volume.
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired audio
type.

Cannot switch audio.

Page
≥Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings. Check the input mode on the
amplifier if you have connected one.
≥Press [AUDIO] to select the audio.
≥Turn off V.S.S. in the following cases.
–When using discs that do not have surround sound effects such as Karaoke discs.
–When playing bilingual broadcast programmes.
≥[DVD-A] The disc may have a restriction on the method of audio output. When playing multichannel DVD-Audio, only audio for the two front channels will be output. Refer to the disc’s
jacket.
≥Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX)
≥If recording to the HDD or a DVD-RAM when “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, you
can only record either the main or secondary audio of a bilingual broadcast.
If you do not intend to copy the title to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL or +RW set “Rec for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu to “Off”.
≥You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.
–When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the
disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
–When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM”.
–When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”.
≥When connecting an amplifier using an optical digital cable, you cannot switch the audio if
“Dolby Digital” is set to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using audio
cables.
≥There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of how the disc was created.

14–17,
67
36
43

—

—
26

—

Troubleshooting guide

EH55.book

67
26
17, 67

—

Operation
Cannot operate the television.
The remote control doesn’t work.

≥Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be operated even if you change the
code.
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote
control.

23
23

Press and hold [ENTER] and the indicated number button at the same
time for more than 2 seconds.
≥The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones.
≥You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s remote control signal sensor during
operation.
≥Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.
≥Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that may be subject to sunlight
exposure.
≥It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again after changing the batteries.
≥It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after changing the batteries.
≥The child lock function is activated.

11
—

The unit is on but cannot be
operated.

≥Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected properly.
≥Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.
≥The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to disappear.
≥One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
Reset the unit as follows:
1 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about 10
seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one minute, then reconnect it.
2 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still cannot be operated, consult the
dealer.

24, 34
—
—
—

HDD activation is slow.

≥The HDD is in SLEEP mode. (“SLEEP” appears in the unit’s display.)

9

Cannot eject disc.

≥The unit is recording.
≥Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s
display blinks when [Í DVD] is pressed). Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby.
≥The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the
main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.
If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does not work. Cancel the Child Lock
function.

—
33

Cannot tune channels.
Cannot download channel
presets from the television.

≥Check the connections.
≥You must connect to a television equipped with the Q Link function with a fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable to download channel presets.

—
—
23
23
64

64

14–15
—

Startup is slow.

≥Make sure that “Quick Start” is set to “On”.
≥Startup takes time in the following situations:
–A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.
–The clock is not set.
–Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is connected.
–For a few minutes after 5:15 am due to system maintenance of this unit.

68
—

Takes time to read DVD-RAM.

≥It may take time to read a disc if it is being used for the first time in this unit or it has not been
used for a long time.

—
RQT8415

77

EH55.book

Page 78 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Troubleshooting guide

Recording, timer recording and copying
Cannot record.
Cannot copy.

4, 5
61
60
81
45, 50,
61
—
45, 50,
61

—
—
—
—

≥Check that the connection is correct.

Timer recording does not work
properly.

≥The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme times overlap. Correct the
programme.
≥The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer icon “F” in the timer recording
list is not on.)
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press the “Red” button.
≥Set the clock.
≥(If the GUIDE Plus+ system is set)
The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded at 2:50 AM every day. It takes approximately 2 hours
to complete data download. If you want to make timer recordings during this time, set “Night
Download” in the GUIDE Plus+ system setup menu to “Off”.

31

≥Make sure that the recording drive is selected. Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
recording drive.
≥When using the linked timer recording with external equipment, press [EXT LINK]. (“EXT-L”
disappears.)
≥If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while “Quick Start” is set to “On”,
you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.

31

The timer programme remains
even after recording finishes.

≥The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly.

30

A part or whole of a recorded
title has been lost.

≥If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the household mains socket while
recording or editing, the title may be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.
You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use a new disc. We cannot offer
any guarantee regarding lost programmes or discs.

—

Timer recording does not stop
even when [∫] is pressed.

≥Select the input channel (“AV2”, “AV3”, “AV4” or “DV”) for the equipment you have connected.

14–15,
58
—

31

71
21

33
—

61

The programme name and the
recorded title do not match.

≥There was a programme change after timer recording was set but the recorded title still has
the old programme name.

—

Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc.
disc using the high speed mode.

≥When recording to the HDD, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” in the Setup menu.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in EP or FR (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode, you cannot
perform high-speed copy.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD recorders with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “On”, and then copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL
or +RW discs with high-speed copy.

26
—

≥Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if the disc is high speed
recording compatible, the maximum speed may not be possible due to the condition of the
disc.
≥It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.
≥You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours when using other Panasonic
DVD Recorders that are not compatible with EP (8 Hours) mode recording.

—

An unusually loud sound is
coming from the rotating DVD-R,
etc.

≥When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound of the disc rotating may be louder than normal,
however, this is not a problem.

—

The DV automatic recording
function does not work.

≥If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted, check the connections and DV
equipment settings.
≥You cannot start recording until the images from the DV equipment appear on the television.
≥Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes on the tape in the DV
equipment are not successive.
≥Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may not operate properly.
≥The audio/video recordings are recorded on other than a DV tape.

58

When copying, it takes a long
time even when high speed
mode is selected.

78

Page

Cannot record from external
equipment.

SHOWVIEW programming does not
work properly.

RQT8415

≥You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be recorded on. Insert a disc the
unit can record onto.
≥The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to PROTECT, or the disc is protected with DVD
Management.
≥Some programmes have limitations on the number of times they can be recorded (CPRM).
≥You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the number of titles has reached
its limit. Delete unwanted titles or use a new disc.
≥You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] In the following situations, you cannot copy. Delete unnecessary titles from the
HDD and then copy.
–If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will copy titles from the HDD to a
blank disc and fill the entire disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode
recording is necessary).
–If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be copied has exceeded 500.
≥You cannot record and copy on finalized discs. However, you can record and copy again if
you format DVD-RW.
≥Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and
+RW you may be unable to record onto them if you either insert and remove the disc or
switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of fifty times.
≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW recorded on this unit
may not be recordable on other Panasonic DVD Recorders.
≥This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC signals. (However, both types
of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.) Play of discs recorded with both PAL and
NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.

—

—
—

—
—
—
58

Page 79 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Play
Play fails to start even when
[1] (PLAY) is pressed.
Play starts but then stops
immediately.

Audio and video momentarily
pause.

Page
≥Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up.
≥The disc is dirty.
≥You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.
≥You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalized on the equipment used for recording.
≥You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title that was recorded to DVD-RAM
using a different Panasonic DVD Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to
copyright protection.
≥When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD
players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use “EP (6 Hours)” mode.
≥You cannot play discs during DV automatic recording.
≥If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you purchased it. (DivX)

34
10
4–6
—
—

≥This occurs between playlist chapters.
≥This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles on finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high
speed mode.
≥This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches
between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme. However, video
and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.

—
—

66
—
39

—
5

DVD-Video is not played.

≥You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change this setting.

66

Alternative soundtrack and
subtitles cannot be selected.

≥The languages are not recorded on the disc.
≥You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the soundtrack and subtitles on
some discs. Use the disc’s menus to make changes.

—
35

No subtitles.

≥Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.
≥Turn the subtitles on. Set “Subtitle” on the on-screen menu to “On”.

—
42

Angle cannot be changed.

≥Angles can only be changed during scenes where different angles are recorded.

—

You have forgotten your ratings
password.
You want to cancel the ratings
level.

≥The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc tray is open, press
[DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on
the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on the unit’s display).

—

Quick View does not work.

≥This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.
≥This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.

—
—

The resume play function does
not work.

≥Memorized positions are cancelled when
–press [∫] several times.
–open the disc tray (excluding [HDD]).
–[DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] [SD] turn off the power.
–if a recording or timer recording was executed.

—

The Video CD picture does not
display properly.

≥When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV System” in the Setup menu.
≥When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture cannot be displayed correctly during
search.

70
—

Time Slip does not work.

≥Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings are different from the title
recorded on the disc.

70

It takes time before play starts.

≥This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)

—

Picture stops.

≥Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX)

—

Available disc space does not
increase even after deleting a
title.

≥Available disc space does not increase after deleting on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL.
≥Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is deleted on DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format) and +RW. The disc space does not increase when any other titles are deleted.

50
—

Cannot edit.

≥You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available space.
Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space.

50

Cannot format.

≥The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
≥You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in this unit.

10
4–6

Cannot create chapters.

—

Cannot mark the start point or
the end point during “Partial
Delete” operation.

≥The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when you turn it off or remove the
disc. The information is not written if there is an interruption to the power before this.
≥These operations are not possible with still pictures.
≥You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You cannot set an end point before a
start point.

Cannot delete chapters.

≥When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine Chapters” to make the chapter longer.

45

Cannot create a playlist.

≥You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title also includes still pictures. Select
them individually.

—

Troubleshooting guide

EH55.book

Edit

—
—

RQT8415

79

EH55.book

Page 80 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Troubleshooting guide

Still pictures
Cannot display Direct Navigator
screen.

≥This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy or while the unit is standing by for
linked timer recording with external equipment.

—

Cannot edit or format a card.

≥Release the card’s protection setting. (With some cards, the “Write Protection Off” message
sometimes appears on the screen even when protection has been set.)

60

The contents of the card cannot
be read.

≥The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents on the card may be damaged.)
Format using FAT 12 or FAT 16 with other equipment or format the card with this unit.
≥The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are not compatible with this
unit.
≥Turn off and then turn on the unit again.
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB.

7, 37
61
7

Copying, deleting and setting
protection takes a long time.

≥When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take a few hours.
≥When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a long time. Format the disc or
card.

—
—
—
61

GUIDE Plus+
The GUIDE Plus+ System does
not receive any data.

≥Check whether GUIDE Plus+ system setup was performed in full.
The GUIDE Plus+ system data is updated several times each day. When the unit is first
connected, the GUIDE Plus+ system is not yet ready to receive data.
It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download.
Depending on when you set up this unit, it may take approximately one day before you can
display the television programme list.
≥Check whether the clock is properly set.
≥If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the GUIDE Plus+ system may not
be able to receive any data.

19–21

71
—

“No Data” is displayed for some
or all stations.

≥These stations may not have been able to be identified automatically.
For these stations, select the “On” in the SUB MENU under “Editor” and assign the correct
reference station manually.
≥Some stations are not supported by the GUIDE Plus+ system.

20

The GUIDE Plus+ information is
not displayed properly.

≥The reference station is not assigned correctly in “Editor”.
Select the correct reference station.
≥There was a programme change.
Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the GUIDE Plus+ system provider or
station provider.

20

The GUIDE Plus+ data transfer
was interrupted.

≥The GUIDE Plus+ system shows the data that was received up to the interruption.
≥The programme information may be incomplete.

—
—

The GUIDE Plus+ data is not
updated.

≥The unit must be in standby mode in order to update the data. If the unit is in EXT LINK mode
(EXT-L lights up in the display), then the data update may also not work.
≥Make sure that the time is set correctly.
≥Check whether “Off” is set under “Night Download” and change the setting in GUIDE Plus+.

—
—
21

≥Programme the Timer recording manually or via SHOWVIEW.

30

≥Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the settings except for the ratings
level, ratings password and time settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.
≥Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the settings other than the
programmed channels, time settings, country settings, language settings, disc language
settings, ratings level, ratings password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.
≥Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the Country setting screen appears.
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and time settings return to the
factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.

68

To reset the ratings level
settings

≥While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and
hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.

—

To restore the unit if it freezes
due to one of the safety devices
being activated

≥Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds. (The settings remain.)

—

“No Data” is displayed in the
GUIDE Plus+ system.

—

—

To reset this unit
To return all the settings other
than the main ones to the factory
preset

RQT8415

80

68
—

EH55.book

Page 81 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Glossary

DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are
possible.
Dynamic range
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
level of sound before distortion occurs.
Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the
loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low
volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.
Electronic Programme Guide (EPG)
This is a system used to display the television programme list on
televisions, computers and cellular phones. Data is transmitted using
the internet or television waves. This unit is compatible with the
method using television waves. You can use the television
programme list for functions such as timer recording.
Film and video
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.
Film: Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24 frames
per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs recorded at 30 frames
per second as well.)
Generally appropriate for motion picture films.
Video: Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL discs) or
30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs). Generally
appropriate for TV drama programmes or animation.
Finalize
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc.
possible on equipment that can play such media. You can finalize
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL on this
unit.
After finalizing, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer
record or edit. However, finalized DVD-RW can be formatted to
become recordable.
Folder
This is a place on the hard disk or memory card where groups of
data are stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the place
where still pictures (JPEG, TIFF) and MPEG2 are stored.
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),
+RW, SD Memory Cards and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on
this unit. Formatting deletes irrevocably all contents.

Frames and fields
Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see
on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.
u

Frame

r

Field

Field

≥A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but
picture quality is generally better.
≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
HDD (Hard disk drive)
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk
with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and
a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading
and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.
If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,
the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering
the degree of compression.
LPCM (Linear PCM)
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on
CDs. LPCM sound is available when recording in XP mode.
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based
digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2.
MPEG2 moving picture files shot with a Panasonic SD multi-camera,
etc. can be copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
An audio compression method that compresses audio to approximately
one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of audio quality. You
can play MP3 you have recorded onto CD-R and CD-RW.
Pan&Scan/Letterbox
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they be
viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images
often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of
picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.
Pan & Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture
fills the screen.

Troubleshooting guide/Glossary

Bitstream
This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel)
before it is decoded into its various channels.
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.
Decoder
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This
is called decoding.
DivX
A video compression format developed by DivXNetworks, Inc. that
compresses video files without any considerable loss of video
quality.
Dolby Digital
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can
also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information can
be recorded on one disc using this method.
When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default
audio.
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on
some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to
the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your television’s
speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing and this unit can then
only output the front two channels.
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format)
DPOF is the standard printing format for still picture data taken by a
digital camera, etc. It is used for automatic printing at a photo
developing store or on your home printer.
Drive
In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD), disc
(DVD) and SD card (SD). These perform the reading and writing of
data.

Letterbox: Black bands appear at the top and
bottom of the picture so the picture
itself appears in an aspect ratio of
16:9.
Playback control (PBC)
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and
information with menus.
(This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)
Progressive/Interlace
The PAL video signal standard has 625 (or 576) interlaced (i) scan
lines, whereas progressive scanning, called 625p (or 576p), uses
twice the number of scan lines. For the NTSC standard, these are
called 525i (or 480i) and 525p (or 480p) respectively.
Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video
recorded on media such as DVD-Video.
Your television must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.
Panasonic televisions with 625 (576)/50i · 50p, 525 (480)/60i · 60p
input terminals are progressive compatible.
Protection
You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or
deletion protection.
RGB
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),
and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them.
By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission,
noise is reduced for even higher quality images.
Sampling frequency
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the
original sound.
Thumbnail
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display
multiple pictures in the form of a list.
TIFF (Tag Image File Format)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures,
a common format for storing high quality images on digital cameras
and other devices.

RQT8415

81

EH55.book

Page 82 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Specifications
Recording system

DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R : DVD-Video format
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW

Recordable discs
DVD-RAM:

DVD-R:

DVD-RW:

Ver. 2.0
Ver. 2.1/3X-SPEED DVD-RAM Revision 1.0
Ver.2.2/5X-SPEED DVD-RAM Revision 2.0
for General Ver. 2.0
for General Ver. 2.0/4X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 1.0
for General Ver.2.x/8X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 3.0
for General Ver.2.x/16X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 6.0
for DL Ver.3.0
for DL Ver.3.x/4X-SPEED DVD-R for DL Revision 1.0
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.x/2X-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 1.0
Ver. 1.x/4X-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 2.0
Ver. 1.x/6X-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 3.0

+R:

Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.2
Ver. 1.3
for DL Ver.1.0
Ver. 1.1
Ver.1.2/4X-SPEED

+RW:

Recording time

Maximum 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)
XP: Approx. 1 hour, SP: Approx. 2 hours
LP: Approx. 4 hours, EP: Approx. 6 hours/8 hours

Maximum Approx. 284 hours with 160 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)
XP: Approx. 36 hours, SP: Approx. 70 hours
LP: Approx. 138 hours, EP: Approx. 212 hours/284 hours
Playable discs
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R : DVD-Video format, MP3, JPEG, DivX
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format, DVD Video Recording format
+R, +R DL (Double Layer), +RW
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD,
CD-R/CD-RW (CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD§1, MP3, JPEG, DivX formatted discs)
SVCD§1
Internal HDD capacity

Video
Video system:
SECAM (only input)/PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields
Recording system:
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)
Video in (SECAM/PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video in (SECAM/PAL/NTSC):
AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
RGB in (PAL):
AV2 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠, termination
Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin), S-Video Out (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
RGB out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠, termination
Component video output (NTSC 480p/480i, PAL 576p/576i)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
PB: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
Television system
Tuner system
PAL-BGH
SECAM-BG
(CCIR)

VHF: E2–E12, A–H2 (Italy)
UHF: 21–69
CATV: S01–S05 (S1–S3),
S1–S20 (M1–U10), S21–S41

SECAM-L, L’§2
(France)

VHF: 2–10
UHF: 21–69
CATV: B–Q (100.5 to 299.5 MHz),
S21–S41 (299.5 to 467.25 MHz)

RF converter output:

82

Not provided

SD card slot
Still picture (JPEG, TIFF)
SD Memory Card slot: 1 pc
Compatible media:
SD Memory Card§3, MultiMediaCard
Format:
FAT12, FAT16
Image file format:
JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for Camera File system),
(sub sampling; 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
TIFF (Uncompressed RGB chunky), DPOF Compatible
Number of pixels:
34 a 34 to 6144 a 4096
Thawing time:
Approx. 3 sec (6 M pixels, JPEG)
SD Video (MPEG2)
Compatible media:
SD Memory Card§3, MultiMediaCard
Codec:
MPEG 2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile)
File Format:
SD-Video format conforming
Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from card to
HDD or DVD-RAM disc.
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVDRAM disc, the playback is possible.

160 GB

Optical pick-up
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)

RQT8415

Channel coverage

LASER specification
Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)
Wave length:
CD
780 nm wave length
DVD
662 nm wave length
Laser power:
No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection
NORSK
Bølgelengde:
CD
780 nm
DVD
662 nm
Laserstyrke:
Ingen farlig stråling sendes ut

DV input (PAL/NTSC)

Audio
Recording system:
Dolby Digital 2ch, Linear PCM (XP mode)
Audio in:
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack)
Input level:
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Input impedance:
More than 10 k≠
Audio out:
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)
Output level:
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Output impedance:
Less than 1 k≠
Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)

[Note]

IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin : 1 pc

Others
Region code:
Operating temperature:
Operating humidity range:
Power supply:
Power consumption:
Dimensions (WkDkH):
Mass:

‚2
5 to 40 oC
10 to 80 % RH (no condensation)
AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz
Approx. 31 W
Approx. 430 mmk329 mmk58 mm
Approx. 4.2 kg

Power consumption in standby mode:
Approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Mass and dimensions are approximate.
§1

Conforming to IEC62107
Not provided for Germany.
§3 Includes miniSDTM cards. (A miniSDTM adaptor needs to be
inserted.)
§2

≥Useable capacity will be less (SD Memory Card).

EH55.book

Page 83 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Safety precautions

Voltage
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit
and cause a fire.
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.

AC mains lead protection
Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not
damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or
electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.
Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC
mains lead can cause electric shock.
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric
shock.

Foreign matter
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric
shock or malfunction.
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or
malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the
power supply and contact your dealer.
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.

Service
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is
interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other
problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect
the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service
centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is
repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power
source if it is not to be used for a long time.

Specifications/Safety precautions

Placement
Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby
shortening the unit’s service life.
Do not place heavy items on the unit.

Information on Disposal for Users of Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment (private households)
This symbol on the products and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products should
not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling, please take these products to designated collection points, where they will
be accepted on a free of charge basis. Alternatively, in some countries you may be able to return your products to your
local retailer upon the purchase of an equivalent new product.
Disposing of this product correctly will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on
human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. Please contact your
local authority for further details of your nearest designated collection point.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.
For business users in the European Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union
This symbol is only valid in the European Union.
If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
“DTS” and “DTS 2.0iDigital Out” are trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.
MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from
Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized
by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited
consumer uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
≥SD logo is a trademark.
≥Portions of this product are protected under copyright law and
are provided under license by ARIS/SOLANA/4C.

GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW are (1) registered trademarks or
trademarks of, (2) manufactured under license from and (3)
subject of various international patents and patent applications
owned by, or licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc.
and/or its related affiliates.

GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/
OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY
WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE
PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED
BY THE GUIDE PLUSi SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT
SHALL GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC.
AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR
ANY AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF
PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF
ANY INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES
RELATING TO THE GUIDE PLUSi SYSTEM.

Official DivX Certified™ product.
Plays DivX® 5, DivX® 4, DivX® 3, and DivX® VOD video content (in
compliance with DivX Certified™ technical requirements).
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of
DivXNetworks, Inc. and are used under license.
RQT8415

83

EH55.book

Page 84 Thursday, January 19, 2006

1:58 PM

Index
Album
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Aspect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Audio
Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . 32
AV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
AV-in NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment– Finalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Ext Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 68

Q Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Finalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 62, 81
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 61, 81
FR (Flexible Recording Mode) . . . . . . 25
FUNCTIONS window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Channel
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 44
Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Cleaning
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Clock settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Connection
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 15
Amplifier, system component . . . . . . . 17
Digital receiver,
satellite receiver, decoder . . . . . . . . . 15
DV input terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14–16
Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . 14, 15
Copy
SD card (MPEG2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Title/Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Copy (playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Country setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 45
Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Language
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
On-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 66
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 66
LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 81

Ratings level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Rec for High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . 26, 66
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Auto Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . 58
External Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28–32
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
RGB
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Delete
Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 47
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
DELETE Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Dialog Enhancer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Direct Navigator . . . . . . . . . 34, 40, 44, 48
Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
DivX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37–39, 81
DPOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 81
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

GUIDE Plus+ . . . . . . . . . . . . 19–21, 28–29
Important notes for recording . . . . . . . . 8
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 81

Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Menu
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38–39
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
On-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Mode
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 39
Name
Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 45
Noise reduction (NR)
AV-in NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Playback NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
On-screen
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
PCM Down Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Picture settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 66
Playback NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 43, 81
Properties
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Protection
Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 13
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Shipping Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
SHOWVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . 27
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Still picture
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
TIFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 81
Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28–32
Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Tuning
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
VPS/PDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
V.S.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Environment friendly printed on chlorine free bleached paper.

Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
Web Site: http://www.panasonic.co.jp/global/

p
RQT8415-L
F0106EN0



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-702
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows)
GTS PDFX Conformance            : PDF/X-1a:2001
GTS PDFX Version                : PDF/X-1:2001
Trapped                         : False
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2
Modify Date                     : 2006:01:19 14:01:11+09:00
Create Date                     : 2006:01:19 13:59:34+09:00
Metadata Date                   : 2006:01:19 14:01:11+09:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : EH55.book
Creator                         : Administrator
Document ID                     : uuid:bcd94994-0b1c-42b0-a577-2ce67def68e3
Instance ID                     : uuid:a60bd317-4524-47ec-8d7c-aa8f0dc93752
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 84
Author                          : Administrator
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu